Anda di halaman 1dari 228

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series V100R005C01

Hardware Description
Issue Date 02 2013-08-10

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX PTN 960 Huawei iManager U2000 Version V100R005C01 V100R009C00

Intended Audience
This document describes the equipment structure, chassis structure, and board classification. This document also describes each board of these classes in details. This document helps you get the detailed information about the equipment hardware. This document is intended for: l l l Network planning engineers Hardware installation engineers System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

DANGER

WARNING
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

About This Document

Symbol

Description

CAUTION
TIP

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. TIP indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. NOTE provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

NOTE

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.

Changes in Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Based on Product Version V100R005C01


Compared with Product Version (V100R005C01)_Doc Version 01 (2013-05-31), the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update 3.1 Valid Slots Change Description The structure is adjusted as follows: "Valid Slots for Boards" is moved to 3 Boards. 3 Boards The following topics are added: l 3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board and Interface Board l 3.4 Differences Between System Control Boards Pluggable Electrical Module
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

The mapping boards are updated.


iii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

About This Document

Update Whole document

Change Description Known bugs are updated.

Changes in Issue 01 (2013-05-31) Based on Product Version V100R005C01


This document is the first release of the V100R005C01 version. Compared with Product Version (V100R005C00)_Doc Version 02 (2013-01-15), the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update 3 Boards Change Description The following topics are added: l 3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and Interface Numbers on the U2000 D Board Dimensions Whole document This topic is added. Known bugs are updated.

Changes in Issue 02 (2013-01-15) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


Compared with issue 01 of the V100R005C00 version, this issue has the following updates: Update Functions and Features (Boards with Ethernet interfaces) Working Principle and Signal Flow (System control boards) Description Description of supported port working modes is added. l Block diagrams are modified. l Description about the CF card functions is added. Dimensions and weight of the extended chassis are added. Dimensions of the mounting ears are added. Known defects are fixed.

2 Extended Chassis C Mounting Ears Whole manual

Changes in Issue 01 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................1 2 Extended Chassis...........................................................................................................................3 3 Boards..............................................................................................................................................5
3.1 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................................................7 3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board and Interface Board...............................................................................8 3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and Interface Numbers on the U2000.................................................................9 3.4 Differences Between System Control Boards..............................................................................................................10 3.5 TND3CXPA.................................................................................................................................................................11 3.5.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................11 3.5.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................11 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................12 3.5.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................14 3.5.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................19 3.5.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................19 3.6 TND3CXPB..................................................................................................................................................................19 3.6.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................19 3.6.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................19 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................20 3.6.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................22 3.6.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................26 3.6.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................27 3.7 TND1EX1.....................................................................................................................................................................27 3.7.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................27 3.7.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................27 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................28 3.7.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................30 3.7.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................31 3.7.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................31 3.8 TND1EM8F..................................................................................................................................................................32 3.8.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................33 Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

Contents

3.8.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................33 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................34 3.8.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................35 3.8.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................37 3.8.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................38 3.9 TND1EM8T..................................................................................................................................................................42 3.9.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................42 3.9.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................42 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................43 3.9.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................45 3.9.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................47 3.9.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................47 3.10 TND1EM4F................................................................................................................................................................47 3.10.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................47 3.10.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................48 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................48 3.10.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................50 3.10.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................52 3.10.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................52 3.11 TND1EM4T................................................................................................................................................................57 3.11.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................57 3.11.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................57 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................58 3.11.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................60 3.11.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................62 3.11.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................62 3.12 TND2AQ1..................................................................................................................................................................62 3.12.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................62 3.12.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................63 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................64 3.12.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................66 3.12.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................67 3.12.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................67 3.13 TND1SQ1...................................................................................................................................................................69 3.13.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................70 3.13.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................70 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................71 3.13.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................73 3.13.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................74 3.13.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................75 3.14 TND1CQ1B................................................................................................................................................................77 Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

Contents

3.14.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................77 3.14.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................77 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................79 3.14.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................81 3.14.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................82 3.14.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................82 3.15 TND3ML1A/TND3ML1B.........................................................................................................................................84 3.15.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................85 3.15.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................85 3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................87 3.15.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................88 3.15.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................91 3.15.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................91 3.16 TND2MD1A/TND2MD1B........................................................................................................................................92 3.16.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................92 3.16.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................92 3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................94 3.16.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................96 3.16.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................98 3.16.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................98 3.17 TND1PIU....................................................................................................................................................................99 3.17.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................99 3.17.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................99 3.17.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................100 3.17.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................101 3.17.5 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................102 3.18 TND1FAN................................................................................................................................................................103 3.18.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................103 3.18.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................103 3.18.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................103 3.18.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................105 3.18.5 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................106

4 Filler Panel..................................................................................................................................107
4.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................................108 4.2 Appearance and Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................108

5 Pluggable Optical Modules.....................................................................................................109


5.1 Appearance and Application......................................................................................................................................110 5.2 Optical Module Labels...............................................................................................................................................111

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System.............................................................115


6.1 Structure and Functions..............................................................................................................................................116 Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

Contents

6.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................................118 6.3 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................122

7 Fibers and Cables......................................................................................................................124


7.1 Fibers..........................................................................................................................................................................126 7.1.1 Fiber Types..............................................................................................................................................................126 7.1.2 Common Fiber Connectors......................................................................................................................................127 7.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable.........................................................................................................................................129 7.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF..........................................................................................................................130 7.4 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................133 7.5 Service Cables............................................................................................................................................................134 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables........................................................................................................................................................134 7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables...........................................................................................................................................137 7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................140 7.6 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................................143 7.7 Clock Cables...............................................................................................................................................................144 7.7.1 External Clock Cables.............................................................................................................................................144 7.7.2 Clock Bridging Cable..............................................................................................................................................146 7.8 Alarm Input/Output Cables........................................................................................................................................148 7.9 AC Power Monitoring and Alarm-reporting Cable....................................................................................................149

A Safety Labels.............................................................................................................................151 B Indicators....................................................................................................................................154 C Mounting Ears...........................................................................................................................161 D Board Dimensions....................................................................................................................166 E Power Consumption and Weight...........................................................................................167 F Board Configuration Parameters............................................................................................168 G Glossary......................................................................................................................................170

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

1 Chassis

1
The OptiX PTN 960 is case-shaped for easy deployment. Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX PTN 960 equipment. Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX PTN 960

Chassis

The dimensions of the OptiX PTN 960 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 2 U (height, 1 U = 44.45 mm). The OptiX PTN 960 can be installed in the following: l l l l l l l ETSI cabinet (300 mm deep) ETSI cabinet (600 mm deep) 19 inch cabinet (450 mm deep) 19 inch cabinet (600 mm deep) Indoor Mini Box (IMB) network box APM30H outdoor cabinet Open rack

The PTN equipment can be installed indoors or outdoors. The installation must satisfy the requirement of running environment for equipment. To better satisfy the requirement, you can install the equipment in an IMB network cabinet or an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Use the EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply system to provide power to the IMB network box or outdoor cabinet.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

1 Chassis

Figure 1-2 Slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 960


PIU Slot 10 PIU Slot 9 CXP FAN Slot 11 Slot 7 CXP Slot 8

Slot 5 Slot 3 Slot 1

Slot 6 Slot 4 Slot 2

Power board area Fan board area

Interface board area System control board area

The slot capability of the slots housing the board varies with the system control board. Table 1-1 lists the processing capacity of each slot in the OptiX PTN 960 chassis. Table 1-1 Slot capacity of the OptiX PTN 960 Slot Number 1 to 2 3 to 4 5 to 6 TND3CXPA 8 x 1G 4 x 1G 1 x 10G TND3CXPB 8 x 1G 4 x 1G or 1 x 10G 1 x 10G

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

2 Extended Chassis

2
Slot Allocation
Figure 2-1 Slot allocation of the extended chassis
SLOT 10 SLOT 9 SLOT 7 SLOT 11 SLOT 5 SLOT 3 SLOT 1 SLOT 12 SLOT 13

Extended Chassis

OptiX PTN 960 supports an extended chassis with the power supply monitoring module, and provides slots 12 and 13 for installing the AC power supply modules.

Figure 2-1 shows the slot allocation of the extended chassis.

SLOT 8 SLOT 6 SLOT 4 SLOT 2 Monitoring Module

Functions
Functions of the extended chassis are as follows: l l Provides an interface for inputting AC power to provide 220 V/110 V AC power to the equipment. Provides slots 12 and 13 for installing TND2APIU modules. APIU modules are used to convert the AC power to the DC power, and their online status can be queried on the NMS. The two APIU modules work at the same time in load-sharing mode and they are hot backups for each other. The chassis is configured with one or two rectifier modules. When one APIU module is configured, the maximum output current is 15 A; when two APIU modules are configured, the maximum output current is 30 A.
NOTE

A filler panel must be inserted into an empty slot intended for a rectifier module.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

2 Extended Chassis

Integrates a monitoring module that provides an active and a standby RS232/RS485 communication interfaces, enables the device to monitor the AC input status of the EPS30-4815 power supply system, and reserves one DB50 interface for later extension of the monitoring function. Provides two load interfaces for outputting -53.5 V DC power to two PIUs, which provide power to the OptiX PTN 960. Provides two load control fuses, that is, FU-1 with a fuse capacity of 10 A and FU-2 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. These fuses enable/disable output of the load and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the load. Provides one interface for connecting to a group of storage batteries. When working normally, the OptiX PTN 960 is charging the storage batteries. When input of the 220 V/ 110 V AC power stops, the storage batteries provide power to the OptiX PTN 960. This ensures uninterrupted power supply to the OptiX PTN 960. Provides a storage battery protection fuse, that is, FU-3 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. This fuse enables/disables the storage batteries and provides overload and short-circuit protection for the storage batteries.

l l

Dimensions and Weight


Dimensions (mm): 446 (width) x 250 (depth) x 3 U (height, 3 U = 133.35 mm) Weight (empty chassis, kg): 5.60

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3
About This Chapter
3.1 Valid Slots Boards are the key hardware components of the equipment.

Boards

OptiX PTN 960 include system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, interface boards, power supply board, and fan board.

3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board and Interface Board Interface boards supported by OptiX PTN 960 depends on the system control board configured on it. 3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and Interface Numbers on the U2000 This topic describes the mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interface numbers on the U2000. 3.4 Differences Between System Control Boards This topic describes the differences between system control boards for the OptiX PTN 960. 3.5 TND3CXPA This section describes the CXPA, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.6 TND3CXPB This section describes the CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.7 TND1EX1 This section describes the EX1, which is an interface board with one 10GE optical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.8 TND1EM8F This section describes the EM8F, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE optical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.9 TND1EM8T This section describes the EM8T, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE electrical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.10 TND1EM4F This section describes the EM4F, which is an interface board with four FE/GE optical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.11 TND1EM4T This section describes the EM4T, which is an interface board with four FE/GE electrical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.12 TND2AQ1 This section describes the TND2AQ1, a 4 x STM-1 ATM service interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.13 TND1SQ1 This section describes the TND1SQ1, 4 channels STM-1 service interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.14 TND1CQ1B This section describes the TND1CQ1B, which is a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.15 TND3ML1A/TND3ML1B This section describes the ML1A/ML1B, a 16-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.16 TND2MD1A/TND2MD1B This section describes the MD1A/MD1B, a 32-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.17 TND1PIU This section describes the TND1PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications. 3.18 TND1FAN This section describes the TND1FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.1 Valid Slots


Boards are the key hardware components of the equipment.

Board Description and Valid Slots


Table 3-1 shows the boards supported by the OptiX PTN 960 and their valid slots. Table 3-1 Boards supported by the OptiX PTN 960 and their valid slots Board Name TND3CXPA TND3CXPB TND1EX1 Board Description System control, switching and timing board System control, switching and timing board 1 Channel 10GE Optical Interface Board Valid Slot Slot 7, slot 8 Slot 7, slot 8 Slots 5-6 (working with the TND3CXPA board) Slots 3-6 (working with the TND3CXPB board) TND1EM8F TND1EM8T TND1EM4F TND1EM4T TND3ML1A TND3ML1B TND2MD1A TND2MD1B TND1CQ1B TND1SQ1 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board 8 Channels GE/FE Copper Interface Board 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board 4 Channels GE/FE Copper Interface Board 16 Channels E1 service interface board (75 ohms) 16 Channels service interface board (120 ohms) 32 Channels service interface board (75 ohms) 32 Channels service interface board (120 ohms) 4 Channels STM-1 Optical Interface Board 4 Channels STM-1 Optical Interface Board Slots 1-2 Slots 1-2 Slots 1-4 Slots 1-4 Slots 1-6 Slots 1-6 Slots 1-6 Slots 1-6 Slots 1-6 Slots 1-6

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Name TND2AQ1 TND2APIU TND1PIU TND1FAN

Board Description 4 Channels STM-1 Optical Interface Board Power board Power board Fan board

Valid Slot Slots 1-6 Slots 12-13 Slots 9-10 Slot 11

Board Relationships
The OptiX PTN 960 uses different boards to achieve various functions. Figure 3-1 shows board relationships of the OptiX PTN 960. Figure 3-1 Board relationships of the OptiX PTN 960
1 User side 2 3 4 Network side
1. ETH/OAM 2. CLK 3. TOD 4. ALMI/O

GE/FE GE/FE 10GE E1 E1 STM-1 (VC12) STM-1 (VC3/VC4) ATM STM-1

EM4T/EM4F EM8T/EM8F EX1 ML1A/ML1B MD1A/MD1B CQ1B SQ1

Control and management module Service processing and forwarding module

EM4T/EM4F EM8T/EM8F EX1 ML1A/ML1B MD1A/MD1B

GE/FE GE/FE 10GE E1 E1

Clock module
AQ1

TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB

Power supply module APIU/ PIU

Heat dissipation module FAN

3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board and Interface Board
Interface boards supported by OptiX PTN 960 depends on the system control board configured on it.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-2 provides the mapping between the system control board and interface board for the OptiX PTN 960.
NOTE

l : The interface board can be used with the system control board. l X: The interface board cannot be used with the system control board.

Table 3-2 Mapping between the system control board and interface board Board TND1EX1 TND1EM8F TND1EM8T TND1EM4F TND1EM4T TND2AQ1 TND3ML1A TND3ML1B TND2MD1A TND2MD1B TND1SQ1 TND1CQ1B TND3CXPA TND3CXPB

3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and Interface Numbers on the U2000
This topic describes the mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interface numbers on the U2000. Table 3-3 shows the mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interface numbers on the U2000. Table 3-3 Mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interface numbers on the U2000 Board Name TND1EX1 Service Interface (s) OUT IN Interface number(s) on the U2000 D1EX1-1(PORT1)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Name TND1EM8F TND1EM8T TND1EM4F TND1EM4T TND2AQ1 TND1SQ1 TND1CQ1B TND3ML1A TND3ML1B TND2MD1A

Service Interface (s) OUT1 IN1 to OUT8 IN8 FE/GE1 to FE/GE8 OUT1 IN1 to OUT4 IN4 FE/GE1 to FE/GE4 OUT1 IN1 to OUT4 IN4 OUT1 IN1 to OUT4 IN4 OUT1 IN1 to OUT4 IN4 E1 (1 to 16) E1 (1 to 16) 1. E1 (1 to 16) 2. E1 (17 to 32)

Interface number(s) on the U2000 D1EM8F-1(PORT-1) to D1EM8F-8 (PORT-8) D1EM8T-1(PORT-1) to D1EM8T-8 (PORT-8) D1EM4F-1(PORT-1) to D1EM4F-4 (PORT-4) D1EM4T-1(PORT-1) to D1EM4T-4 (PORT-4) D2AQ1-1(PORT-1) to D2AQ1-4(PORT-4) D1SQ1-1(PORT-1) to D1SQ1-4(PORT-4) D1CQ1B-1(PORT-1) to D1CQ1B-4 (PORT-4) D3ML1A-1(PORT-1) to D3ML1A-16 (PORT-16) D3ML1B-1(PORT-1) to D3ML1B-16 (PORT-16) 1. D2MD1A-1(PORT-1) to D2MD1A-16 (PORT-16) 2. D2MD1A-17(PORT-17) to D2MD1A-32 (PORT-32)

TND2MD1B

1. E1 (1 to 16) 2. E1 (17 to 32)

1. D2MD1B-1(PORT-1) to D2MD1B-16 (PORT-16) 2. D2MD1B-17(PORT-17) to D2MD1B-32 (PORT-32)

3.4 Differences Between System Control Boards


This topic describes the differences between system control boards for the OptiX PTN 960. Table 3-4 shows the differences between system control boards for the OptiX PTN 960. Table 3-4 Differences between system control boards Aspect Cross-connect capacity
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

TND3CXPA 44 Gbit/s

TND3CXPB 56 Gbit/s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Aspect Packet processing capability Maximum number of 10GE optical interfaces Interface boards

TND3CXPA 65.48 Mbit/s

TND3CXPB 83.33 Mbit/s

2 The TND1EX1 board can be installed in slot 5 or 6.

4 The TND1EX1 board can be installed in any of slots 3 to 6.

3.5 TND3CXPA
This section describes the CXPA, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.5.1 Version Description


The functional version of the CXPA is TND3.

3.5.2 Functions and Features


The CXPA controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces. Table 3-5 lists the functions and features of the CXPA. Table 3-5 Functions and Features of the CXPA Function and Feature Basic funtion Description Cross-connect capacity: 44 Gbit/s Supports switching, control, and clock management. Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function. APS Supports MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching. OAM l ETH Service OAM l ETH Port OAM l MPLS-TP OAM l MPLS OAM Auxiliary interface function Provides one Ethernet NM interface/NM serial interface for communication with the NMS.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description Provides one time input/output interface and provides the synchronization time source for the equipment. This interface can also be used as a common interface for inputting and outputting AC power input monitoring signals for the EPS30-4815 power supply system. Provides one clock input/output interface and provides the synchronization clock source for the equipment. Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface is reserved for later use.

Tact switches

Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector levers to remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered to start the active/standby protection switching.

NOTE When you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switching is triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers. The clock interface on the working CXPA is independent to the one on the standby CXPA. The interfaces can provide two channels of clock input/output signals.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The CXPA mainly consists of the service processing and grooming module, system control module, clock processing module, auxiliary interface module, and power supply module. Figure 3-2 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-2 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA
Backplane
NM pass-through The other CXPA

NM network interface/ serial interface Time input/output interface Clock input/output interface Alarm input/output interface

NM communication

System control module CPU control unit


Active/standby board communication bus The other CXPA

Auxiliary interface module

NM serial interface

Time/clock signals

Time/clock signals

Management bus

CF card

Time/clock signals

Logic control unit

Clock Signal

Interface boards

Clock processing module

Time/clock signals

Management bus

Under-voltage/ over-voltage detection bus

Service processing and grooming module

Service signals Interface boards Service communication bus The other CXPA

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V 12 V 3.3 V

System power supply System power supply FAN Interface Boards

Service Processing and Grooming Module


This module performs the following functions: l l Grooms services with 44 Gbit/s switching capacity. Supports automatic switching and manual switching of the active and standby boards.

System Control Module


This module performs the following functions: l l The CPU control unit works with the logic control unit to detects alarms and hardware faults, control boards, process overhead, and manage the equipment. The logic control unit provides interfaces through which the CPU control unit connects to other chips on the board. The logic control unit specifies the working states of chips, initializes chips, and operates the register. In addition, the logic control unit achieves log control on active/standby switching, monitors the working state of the board, and detects the states of other boards. Provides a pluggable CF card. Main functions of the CF card are as follows:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Software package storage: During an NE upgrade in the package loading mode, the CF card is used to store the software package used for the upgrade. Data backup: The NE logs and database are periodically backed up from the FLASH chip to the CF card for fault recovery. Configuration restoration: If the CF RCV button is pressed down for 5s, configuration information in the CF card can be automatically restored to the device.

Clock Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l l l Provides working clock signals for the key chips on the CXPA. Supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, and provides system clock signals for each boards. Processes the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock/time synchronization.

Auxiliary Interface Module


This module performs the following functions: l l l Provides one NM Ethernet interface or NM serial interface. Provides one time input/output interface and one time input/output interface. Provides one alarm input/output interface.

Power Supply Module


This module performs the following functions: l l l l Accesses two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supplies. Detects and reports overvoltage and undervoltage of two input power supplies. Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board. Supplies 3.3 V working power for the local board and the other boards in a centralized manner.

3.5.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the CXPA, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPA. Figure 3-3 Front panel of the CXPA

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPA: l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPA: l l CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use. RST button, which is used for warm reset on the board. When you press the RST button and then release it, the board is reset (warm). When the active SCC board is reset, active/ standby switchover will be triggered and services will be switched in 50 ms. LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, all the board indicators on the NE are on.

Switch for the Ejector Lever


On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To remove a board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers.

Interface
Table 3-6 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPATable 3-6. Table 3-6 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA Interface on the Front Panel ETH/ OAM Interface Type Usage Pin Correspondi ng Cable

RJ-45

Ethernet NM interface or NM serial interface

For details, seeTable 3-7.

For details, see7.6 Management Cables.

CLK

RJ-45

Clock input/output interface

For details, For details, seeTable 3-9 and see7.7 Clock Table 3-10. Cables.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface on the Front Panel TOD

Interface Type

Usage

Pin

Correspondi ng Cable

RJ-45

Time input/output interface TOD can also be used as a common interface for inputting and outputting AC power input monitoring signals for the EPS30-4815 power supply system.

For details, see7.7 Clock Cables.

ALMI/ ALMO

RJ-45

Alarm input/output interface

For details, seeTable 3-11.

For details, see7.8 Alarm Input/Output Cables.

NOTE CLK and TOD interfaces on active and standby system control boards can be used as time/clock interfaces or power alarm monitoring interfaces. For each NE, only one CLK/TOD interface can be configured to monitor power alarms. When the CLK or TOD interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoring signals, you need to modify Interface Type on the U2000. For details on how to modify Interface Type on the U2000, see Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface in the OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide.

Table 3-7 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Transmit positive of the NM interface Transmit negative of the NM interface Receive positive of the NM interface Grounding end of the NM serial interface Receive end of the NM serial interface Receive negative of the NM interface Unspecified Transmit end of the NM serial interface

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-8 Pins of the CLK Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Negative receive end of CLK Positive receive end of CLK Unspecified Positive transmit end of CLK Negative transmit end of CLK Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 3-9 Pins of the TOD (External Time Mode) Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) 1
87654321

External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information) Unspecified Unspecified Negative output for the 1pps signal (RS422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Negative output for time information (RS422 level)

External Time Input (DCLS) Unspecified Unspecified Negative input for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Positive input for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Unspecified

External Time Output (DCLS) Unspecified Unspecified Negative output for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Positive output for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Unspecified

Unspecified Unspecified Negative input for the 1pps signal (RS422 level)

2 3

4 5 6

Grounding end Grounding end Positive input for the 1pps signal (RS422 level)

Negative input for time information (RS422 level)

Negative output for time information (RS422 level)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Pin

Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information) Positive output for time information (RS422 level) External Time Input (DCLS) Unspecified External Time Output (DCLS) Unspecified

Positive input for time information (RS422 level)

NOTE The TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding four working modes.

Table 3-10 Pins of the TOD (Alarm Monitoring Mode) Front View Pin 1
87654321

Usage Unspecified Unspecified Transmit negative Grounding end Grounding end Transmit positive Receive negative Receive positive

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 3-11 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Alarm input 1 Grounding end for alarm input 1 Alarm input 2 Alarm input 3 Grounding end for alarm input 3 Grounding end for alarm input 2 Positive for critical or major alarm signal output

2 3 4 5 6 7

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Pin 8

Usage Negative for critical or major alarm signal output

3.5.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPA. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the CXPA. l l l Ethernet interface External time interface Phase-locked source output by External clock

External time interface For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.5.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the CXPA include board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 22.86 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.68 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 27.3

3.6 TND3CXPB
This section describes the CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.6.1 Version Description


The functional version of the CXPB is TND3.

3.6.2 Functions and Features


The CXPB controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces. Table 3-12 lists the functions and features of the CXPB. Table 3-12 Functions and Features of the CXPB Function and Feature Basic funtion
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Description Cross-connect capacity: 56 Gbit/s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description Supports switching, control, and clock management. Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function.

APS

Supports MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching.

OAM

l ETH Service OAM l ETH Port OAM l MPLS-TP OAM l MPLS OAM

Auxiliary interface function

Provides one Ethernet NM interface/NM serial interface for communication with the NMS. Provides one time input/output interface and provides the synchronization time source for the equipment. This interface can also be used as a common interface for inputting and outputting AC power input monitoring signals for the EPS30-4815 power supply system. Provides one clock input/output interface and provides the synchronization clock source for the equipment. Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface is reserved for later use.

Tact switches

Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector levers to remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered to start the active/standby protection switching.

NOTE When you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switching is triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers. The clock interface on the working CXPB is independent to the one on the standby CXPB. The interfaces can provide two channels of clock input/output signals.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The CXPB mainly consists of the service processing and grooming module, system control module, clock processing module, auxiliary interface module, and power supply module. Figure 3-4 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPB.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPB
Backplane
NM pass-through The other CXPB

NM network interface/ serial interface Time input/output interface Clock input/output interface Alarm input/output interface

NM communication

System control module CPU control unit


Active/standby board communication bus The other CXPB

Auxiliary interface module

NM serial interface

Time/clock signals

Time/clock signals

Management bus

CF card

Time/clock signals

Logic control unit

Clock Signal

Interface boards

Clock processing module

Time/clock signals

Management bus

Under-voltage/ over-voltage detection bus

Service processing and grooming module

Service signals Interface boards Service communication bus The other CXPB

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V 12 V 3.3 V

System power supply System power supply FAN Interface Boards

Service Processing and Grooming Module


This module performs the following functions: l l Grooms services with 56 Gbit/s switching capacity. Supports automatic switching and manual switching of the active and standby boards.

System Control Module


This module performs the following functions: l l The CPU control unit works with the logic control unit to detects alarms and hardware faults, control boards, process overhead, and manage the equipment. The logic control unit provides interfaces through which the CPU control unit connects to other chips on the board. The logic control unit specifies the working states of chips, initializes chips, and operates the register. In addition, the logic control unit achieves log control on active/standby switching, monitors the working state of the board, and detects the states of other boards. Provides a pluggable CF card. Main functions of the CF card are as follows:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Software package storage: During an NE upgrade in the package loading mode, the CF card is used to store the software package used for the upgrade. Data backup: The NE logs and database are periodically backed up from the FLASH chip to the CF card for fault recovery. Configuration restoration: If the CF RCV button is pressed down for 5s, configuration information in the CF card can be automatically restored to the device.

Clock Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides working clock signals for the key chips on the CXPB. Supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, and provides system clock signals for each boards. Processes the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock/time synchronization. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.

Auxiliary Interface Module


This module performs the following functions: l l l Provides one NM Ethernet interface or NM serial interface. Provides one time input/output interface and one time input/output interface. Provides one alarm input/output interface.

Power Supply Module


This module performs the following functions: l l l l Accesses two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supplies. Detects and reports overvoltage and undervoltage of two input power supplies. Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board. Supplies 3.3 V working power for the local board and the other boards in a centralized manner.

3.6.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the CXPB, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-5 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPB. Figure 3-5 Front panel of the CXPB

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPB: l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPB: l l CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use. RST button, which is used for warm reset on the board. When you press the RST button and then release it, the board is reset (warm). When the active SCC board is reset, active/ standby switchover will be triggered and services will be switched in 50 ms. LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, all the board indicators on the NE are on.

Switch for the Ejector Lever


On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To remove a board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers.

Interface
Table 3-13 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPBTable 3-13. Table 3-13 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPB Interface on the Front Panel ETH/ OAM Interface Type Usage Pin Correspondi ng Cable

RJ-45

Ethernet NM interface or NM serial interface

For details, seeTable 3-14.

For details, see7.6 Management Cables. For details, see7.7 Clock Cables.

CLK

RJ-45

Time input/output interface Common interface for inputting and outputting the AC power input monitoring

For details, seeTable 3-16 and Table 3-17.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface on the Front Panel TOD

Interface Type

Usage

Pin

Correspondi ng Cable

RJ-45

signals for the EPS304815 power supply system Alarm input/output interface For details, seeTable 3-18.

For details, see7.7 Clock Cables. For details, see7.8 Alarm Input/Output Cables.

ALMI/ ALMO

RJ-45

NOTE CLK and TOD interfaces on active and standby system control boards can be used as time/clock interfaces or power alarm monitoring interfaces. For each NE, only one CLK/TOD interface can be configured to monitor power alarms. When the CLK or TOD interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoring signals, you need to modify Interface Type on the U2000. For details on how to modify Interface Type on the U2000, see Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface in the OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide.

Table 3-14 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Transmit positive of the NM interface Transmit negative of the NM interface Receive positive of the NM interface Grounding end of the NM serial interface Receive end of the NM serial interface Receive negative of the NM interface Unspecified Transmit end of the NM serial interface

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 3-15 Pins of the CLK Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Negative receive end of CLK Positive receive end of CLK Unspecified Positive transmit end of CLK
24

2 3 4

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Pin 5 6 7 8

Usage Negative transmit end of CLK Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified

Table 3-16 Pins of the TOD Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) 1
87654321

External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information) Unspecified Unspecified Negative output for the 1pps signal (RS422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Negative output for time information (RS422 level)

External Time Input (DCLS) Unspecified Unspecified Negative input for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Positive input for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Unspecified

External Time Output (DCLS) Unspecified Unspecified Negative output for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Positive output for the DCLS time signal (RS422 level) Unspecified

Unspecified Unspecified Negative input for the 1pps signal (RS422 level)

2 3

4 5 6

Grounding end Grounding end Positive input for the 1pps signal (RS422 level)

Negative input for time information (RS422 level)

Negative output for time information (RS422 level) Positive output for time information (RS422 level)

Positive input for time information (RS422 level)

Unspecified

Unspecified

NOTE The TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding four working modes.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-17 Pins of the CLK or TOD (Alarm Monitoring Mode) Front View Pin 1
87654321

Usage Unspecified Unspecified Transmit negative Grounding end Grounding end Transmit positive Receive negative Receive positive

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 3-18 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Alarm input 1 Grounding end for alarm input 1 Alarm input 2 Alarm input 3 Grounding end for alarm input 3 Grounding end for alarm input 2 Positive for critical or major alarm signal output Negative for critical or major alarm signal output

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.6.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPB. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the CXPB. l l l Ethernet interface External time interface Phase-locked source output by External clock

External time interface For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.6.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the CXPB include board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 22.86 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.68 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 27.3

3.7 TND1EX1
This section describes the EX1, which is an interface board with one 10GE optical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.7.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EX1 is TND1.

3.7.2 Functions and Features


The EX1 mainly accesses one 10 GE signals. Table 3-19 lists the functions and features of the EX1. Table 3-19 Functions and Features of the EX1 Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports one 10GE optical or electrical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. DCN Interface function Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Working mode Type of the loopback at the port Auto-Negotiation, 10G FullDuplex LAN PHY-layer inloop MAC-layer inloop and outloop Automatic loopback release at the port Collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at a port
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Supported Supported

27

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature LAG

Description Intra-board LAG supported Inter-board LAG supported Supported Supported

Black list and white list of MAC addresses Clock

Supported Synchronous Ethernet SSM protocol IEEE 1588V2 protocol 1588 ACR clock (unicast and multicast) Supported Supported Supported Supported

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The EX1 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-6 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EX1. Figure 3-6 Block diagram for the functions of the EX1
Backplane 1 x 10 GE signals Service signals

Service access module

Service processing module

Service signals

CXP

Management bus

Management bus

Clock signals

Management module
Management bus

Clock module

Clock signals

CXP CXP

Each module on the board

5.0 V 3.3 V 2.5 V 1.2 V

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply

-48 V/-60 V

Transmit Direction
The service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplaneside interface of the EX1. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallel
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets through the 10 GE interfaces on the front panel.

Receive Direction
The 10 GE interfaces on the front panel receive 10 GE service signals. Then, the service access module performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers and schedules the service packets, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the 10 GE services from the interfaces on the front panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and then sends the services to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service processing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the 10 GE interfaces on the front panel.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface. In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module. This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock. This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.

l l

Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on this board.

Clock module
This module performs the following functions: l l l l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Provides the working clock for each module on the EX1. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and the SSM protocol. Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Supply Module


This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EX1. l l l l 5.0V 3.3V 1.8V 1.2V

3.7.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the EX1, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EX1. Figure 3-7 Front panel of the EX1

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EX1. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A indicator, green or orange, which indicate the port connection and data receiving/ transmitting status

For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
One XFP interface is present on the EX1. Table 3-20 lists types and usage of the optical interfaces. For details on the fibers corresponding to the interfaces, see 7.1 Fibers. Table 3-20 Types and usage of the interfaces on the EX1 Interface on the Front Panel IN OUT
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Interface Type LC LC

Usage

Receives 10GE optical signals. Transmits 10GE optical signals.


30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface on the Front Panel

Interface Type

Usage

Note 1: The XFP interface should be used with an optical module. Note 2: Two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals.

3.7.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TND1EX1. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EX1. l l l Ethernet interface Automatic Laser Shutdown Optical Power Management

For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.7.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the EX1 include the interface specifications, board dimensions, and weight. Table 3-21 lists the specifications of physical the EX1. Table 3-21 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GBASE-L (10km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Single-mode 1260 to 1355 10GBASE-E (40km) Single-mode 1530 to 1565 10GBASE-Z (80km) Single-mode 1530 to 1565 10GBASECWDM (70km) Single-mode For details, see Related optical module part numbers of 10GBASECWDM optical interfaces and related optical module mean launched optical power, receiver
31

-8.2 to 0.5

-4.7 to 4

0 to 4

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Optical interface type

Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GBASE-L (10km) 10GBASE-E (40km) -15.8 10GBASE-Z (80km) -24 10GBASECWDM (70km)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

-14.4

sensitivity and wavelength allocation.

Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module part number

0.5

-1

-7

-9

3.5

8.2

34060313

34060322

34060361

For details, see Related optical module part numbers of 10GBASECWDM optical interfaces and related optical module mean launched optical power, receiver sensitivity and wavelength allocation.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.48 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 13.1

3.8 TND1EM8F
This section describes the EM8F, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE optical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.8.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EM8F is TND1.

3.8.2 Functions and Features


The EM8F mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB. Table 3-22lists the functions and features of the EM8F. Table 3-22 Functions and features of the EM8F Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports four FE/GE optical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the TND3CXPA/ TND3CXPB. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Working mode Type of the loopback at the port Auto-Negotiation, 100M Full Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex PHY-layer outloop MAC-layer inloop and outloop Automatic loopback release at the port LAG Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG Black list and white list of MAC addresses Clock Supported Supported Supported Supported

Interface function

Synchronous Ethernet SSM protocol IEEE 1588V2 protocol

Supported Supported Supported

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The EM8F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-8shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM8F. Figure 3-8 Block diagram for the functions of the EM8F
Backplane 8 x FE/GE signals Service signals

Service access module

Service processing module

Service signals

CXP

Management bus

Management bus

Clock signals

Management module
Management bus

Clock module

Clock signals

CXP CXP

Each module on the board

3.3 V 3.0 V 2.5 V 1.8 V 1.2 V

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply

-48 V/-60 V

Transmit Direction
The service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplaneside interface of the EM8F. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service access module performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the EM8F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on the front panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and then sends the services to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service processing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces based on the access capability of the EM8F and the access bandwidth settings at these interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface. In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on the access capability of the EM8F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module. This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock. This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.

l l

Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM8F.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM8F. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols. Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.

Power Supply Module


This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM8F. l l l l l 3.3V 3.0V 2.5V 1.8V 1.2V

3.8.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the EM8F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-9shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM8F.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-9 Font panel of the EM8F

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM8F. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1 to L/A8 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/receive status

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the EM8F. Table 3-23 and Table 3-24 list the types and usage of the interfaces. Table 3-23 Interfaces of the EM8F Interface on the Front Panel Optical interface IN1 to IN8 Interface Type LC Usage Correspo nding Fiber For details, see 7.1 Fibers.

When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used.

OUT1 to OUT8

LC

When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE/FE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE/FE optical signal.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface on the Front Panel Electrical interface OUT1 IN1 to OUT8 IN8

Interface Type RJ45

Usage

Correspo nding Fiber

Input/Output interfaces for GE/FE For details, electrical signals see 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables.

NOTE The GE SFP interface can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it need to be used with an optical module. l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time. When the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it need to be used with an electrical module.

Table 3-24 Pins of the GE electrical module Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Positive of twisted pair cable 1 Negative of twisted pair cable 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 Negative of twisted pair cable 4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.8.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM8F. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM8F. l l l Ethernet interface Automatic Laser Shutdown Optical Power Management

For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.


Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.8.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the EM8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions, and weight. Table 3-25 lists the specifications of the GE interfaces on the TND1EM8F; Table 3-28 lists the specifications of the SFP interface with an electrical module. Table 3-29 lists the specifications of the FE interfaces on the TND1EM8F. Table 3-25 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interfac e type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 1000B ASESX (0.5 km) Fiber type Working wavelen gth range (nm) Multimode 770 to 860 1000B ASELX (10 km) Singlemode 1270 to 1355 1000B ASEVX (40 km) Singlemode 1260 to 1360 Singlemode 1500 to 1580 1000BA SE-ZX (80 km) 1000BA SE-X (100km ) Singlemode 1500 to 1580 1000BA SECWDM (80 km) Singlemode For details, see wavelen gth allocatio n of 1000BA SECWDM optical interface s and related optical module code. 0 to 5 Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BA SE-BX (10 km) 1000BA SE-BX (40 km) 1000BA SE-BX (80 km)

For details, see wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivit y (dBm)

-9.5 to 0

-11 to -3

-5 to 0

-2 to 5

0 to 5

-9 to -3

-3 to 3

-2 to 4

-17

-19

-23

-23

-30

-28

-19.5

-23

-26

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Optical interfac e type

Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 1000B ASESX (0.5 km) 1000B ASELX (10 km) -3 1000B ASEVX (40 km) -3 -3 1000BA SE-ZX (80 km) 1000BA SE-X (100km ) -10 1000BA SECWDM (80 km) -9 -3 -3 -3 Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BA SE-BX (10 km) 1000BA SE-BX (40 km) 1000BA SE-BX (80 km)

Minimu m overload (dBm) Minimu m extinctio n ratio (dB) Optical module code

8.2

340602 86

340604 73

340602 98

3406036 0

340602 95

For details, see wavelen gth allocatio n of 1000BA SECWDM optical interface s and related optical module code.

For details, see wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 3-26 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code SN 1 2 Optical module code 34060483 34060481 Wavelength (nm) 1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 SN 5 6 Optical module code 34060478 34060476 Wavelength (nm) 1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

SN 3 4

Optical module code 34060479 34060482

Wavelength (nm) 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5

SN 7 8

Optical module code 34060477 34060480

Wavelength (nm) 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5

Table 3-27 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code Item Optical module code Local 34060470 (10 km) 34060539 (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 Remote 34060475 (10 km) 34060540 (40 km) 1480 to 1500 Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1560 to 1580 1480 to 1500 Item Optical module code Local 34060595 (80km) Remote 34060596 (80km)

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1560 to 1580

Table 3-28 Interface specifications of the GE electrical module Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s Complies with IEEE 802.3.

Table 3-29 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-FX (15 km) Fiber type Single-mode 100BASE-FX (40 km) Single-mode 100BASE-FX (80 km) Single-mode Single-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-BX (10 km) Single-mode 100BASE-BX (40 km) Single-mode

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Working wavelength range (nm)

Specification 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code. -15 to -8 For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code. -3 to 2

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module code

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-28

-34

-34

-28.2

-24

-8 8.2

-10 10

-10 10

-8 6.6

-3 8

34060276

34060281

34060282

For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 3-30 Wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code Item Optical module code (10 km) Optical module code (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060638 34060639 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Local

Remote

Note: FE/STM1 optical modules 34060638 and 34060639 can also support 1000 Mbit/s rate.

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.56 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 18.9

3.9 TND1EM8T
This section describes the EM8T, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE electrical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.9.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EM8T is TND1.

3.9.2 Functions and Features


The EM8T mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with the CXP. Table 3-31lists the functions and features of the EM8T. Table 3-31 Functions and features of the EM8T Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports four FE/GE electrical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with the CXP. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full Duplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M Full-Duplex PHY-layer outloop MAC-layer inloop and outloop
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

Interface function

Type of the loopback at the port

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description Automatic loopback release at the port Supported Supported Supported

LAG

Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Black list and white list of MAC addresses Clock

Supported

Synchronous Ethernet SSM protocol IEEE 1588V2 protocol

Supported Supported Supported

Note: When the interfaces on the front panel work in 10 Mbit/s mode, synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588V2 protocol are not applicable.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The EM8T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-10shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM8T. Figure 3-10 Block diagram for the functions of the EM8T
Backplane 8 x FE/GE signals Service signals

Service access module

Service processing module

Service signals

CXP

Management bus

Management bus

Clock signals

Management module
Management bus

Clock module

Clock signals

CXP CXP

Each module on the board

3.3 V 3.0 V 2.5 V 1.8 V 1.2 V

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply

-48 V/-60 V

Transmit Direction
The service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplaneside interface of the EM8T. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding and serial/ parallel conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service access module performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the EM8T and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on the front panel, performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding, and then sends the services to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service processing module, performs coding/decoding, and serial/parallel conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces based on the access capability of the EM8T and the access bandwidth settings at these interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface. In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on the access capability of the EM8T and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module. This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock. This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.

l l

Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM8T.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Provides the working clock for each module on the EM8T. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.

Power Supply Module


This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM8T. l l l l l 3.3V 3.0V 2.5V 1.8V 1.2V

3.9.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the EM8T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-11shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM8T. Figure 3-11 Font panel of the EM8T

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM8T. l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
NOTE

Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service port transmit/receive status indicator (ACT).

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
On the EM8T, eight interfaces are present. Table 3-32 lists the quantity, types, and usage of the interfaces. The interfaces support auto-adaptation in the case of straight-through cables or crossover cables. For corresponding cables, see 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-32 Interfaces on the EM8T Interface on the Front Panel FE/GE1-FE/GE8 Interface Type RJ-45 Usage FE/GE auto-sensing electrical interface, which is used to access the first and the second channels of Ethernet service signals.

NOTE

When working in GE mode, the interfaces can work only in auto-adaptation mode; when working in FE mode, the interfaces supports auto-adaptation mode, a straight-through mode, and crossover cable mode.

Table 3-33 lists pins of the interfaces working in FE mode, and Table 3-34 lists the pins of the interfaces working in GE mode. Table 3-33 Pins of the interfaces (FE mode) Front View Pin 1
87654321

Description Positive of twisted pair 1 Negative of twisted pair 1 Positive of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified Negative of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 3-34 Pins of the interfaces (GE mode) Front View Pin 1
87654321

Description Positive of twisted pair 1 Negative of twisted pair 1 Positive of twisted pair 2 Positive of twisted pair 3 Negative of twisted pair 3 Negative of twisted pair 2 Positive of twisted pair 4
46

2 3 4 5 6 7

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Pin 8

Description Negative of twisted pair 4

3.9.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM8T. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM8T. Ethernet interface For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.9.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the EM8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 3-35 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EM8T. Table 3-35 Specifications of interfaces on the TND1EM8T Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Supports interface rates at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE 802.3.

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.46 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 21.1

3.10 TND1EM4F
This section describes the EM4F, which is an interface board with four FE/GE optical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.10.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EM4F is TND1.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.10.2 Functions and Features


The EM4F mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the CXP. Table 3-36lists the functions and features of the EM4F. Table 3-36 Functions and features of the EM4F Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports four FE/GE optical interfaces. Accesses 4 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the CXP. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Working mode Type of the loopback at the port Auto-Negotiation, 100M Full Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex PHY-layer outloop MAC-layer inloop and outloop Automatic loopback release at the port LAG Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG Black list and white list of MAC addresses Clock Supported Supported Supported Supported

Interface function

Synchronous Ethernet SSM protocol IEEE 1588V2 protocol

Supported Supported Supported

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The EM4F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-12shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM4F.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-12 Block diagram for the functions of the EM4F


Backplane 4 x FE/GE signals Service signals

Service access module

Service processing module

Service signals

CXP

Management bus

Management bus

Clock signals

Management module
Management bus

Clock module

Clock signals

CXP CXP

3.3 V 3.0 V Each module on the board 2.5 V 1.2 V

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply

-48 V/-60 V

Transmit Direction
The service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplaneside interface of the EM4F. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service access module performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the EM4F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on the front panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and then sends the services to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service processing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces based on the access capability of the EM4F and the access bandwidth settings at these interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface. In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on the access capability of the EM4F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module. This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock. This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.

l l

Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM4F.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM4F. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols. Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.

Power Supply Module


This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM4F. l l l l 3.3V 3.0V 2.5V 1.2V

3.10.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the EM4F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-13shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM4F. Figure 3-13 Font panel of the EM4F

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM4F. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1 to L/A4 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/receive status

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the EM4F. Table 3-37 and Table 3-38 list the types and usage of the interfaces. Table 3-37 Interfaces of the EM4F Interface on the Front Panel Optical interface IN1 to IN4 Interface Type LC Usage Correspo nding Fiber For details, see 7.1 Fibers.

When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used.

OUT1 to OUT4

LC

When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE/FE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE/FE optical signal.

Electrical interface

OUT1 IN1 to OUT4 IN4

RJ45

Input/Output interfaces for GE/FE For details, electrical signals see 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface on the Front Panel

Interface Type

Usage

Correspo nding Fiber

NOTE The GE SFP interface can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it need to be used with an optical module. l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time. When the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it need to be used with an electrical module.

Table 3-38 Pins of the GE electrical module Front View Pin 1


87654321

Usage Positive of twisted pair cable 1 Negative of twisted pair cable 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 Negative of twisted pair cable 4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.10.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM4F. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM4F. l l l Ethernet interface Automatic Laser Shutdown Optical Power Management

For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.10.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the EM4F include the interface specifications, board dimensions, and weight.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-39 lists the specifications of the GE interfaces on the EM4F; Table 3-42 lists the specifications of the SFP interface with an electrical module. Table 3-43 lists the specifications of the FE interfaces on the EM4F. Table 3-39 and Table 3-43 list the specifications of physical the TND1EM4F. Table 3-39 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interfac e type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 1000B ASESX (0.5 km) Fiber type Working wavelen gth range (nm) Multimode 770 to 860 1000B ASELX (10 km) Singlemode 1270 to 1355 1000B ASEVX (40 km) Singlemode 1260 to 1360 Singlemode 1500 to 1580 1000BA SE-ZX (80 km) 1000BA SE-X (100km ) Singlemode 1500 to 1580 1000BA SECWDM (80 km) Singlemode For details, see wavelen gth allocatio n of 1000BA SECWDM optical interface s and related optical module code. 0 to 5 Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BA SE-BX (10 km) 1000BA SE-BX (40 km) 1000BA SE-BX (80 km)

For details, see wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivit y (dBm)

-9.5 to 0

-11 to -3

-5 to 0

-2 to 5

0 to 5

-9 to -3

-3 to 3

-2 to 4

-17

-19

-23

-23

-30

-28

-19.5

-23

-26

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Optical interfac e type

Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 1000B ASESX (0.5 km) 1000B ASELX (10 km) -3 1000B ASEVX (40 km) -3 -3 1000BA SE-ZX (80 km) 1000BA SE-X (100km ) -10 1000BA SECWDM (80 km) -9 -3 -3 -3 Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BA SE-BX (10 km) 1000BA SE-BX (40 km) 1000BA SE-BX (80 km)

Minimu m overload (dBm) Minimu m extinctio n ratio (dB) Optical module code

8.2

340602 86

340604 73

340602 98

3406036 0

340602 95

For details, see wavelen gth allocatio n of 1000BA SECWDM optical interface s and related optical module code.

For details, see wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 3-40 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code SN 1 2 Optical module code 34060483 34060481 Wavelength (nm) 1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 SN 5 6 Optical module code 34060478 34060476 Wavelength (nm) 1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

SN 3 4

Optical module code 34060479 34060482

Wavelength (nm) 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5

SN 7 8

Optical module code 34060477 34060480

Wavelength (nm) 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5

Table 3-41 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code Item Optical module code Local 34060470 (10 km) 34060539 (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 Remote 34060475 (10 km) 34060540 (40 km) 1480 to 1500 Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1560 to 1580 1480 to 1500 Item Optical module code Local 34060595 (80km) Remote 34060596 (80km)

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1560 to 1580

Table 3-42 Interface specifications of the GE electrical module Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s Complies with IEEE 802.3.

Table 3-43 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-FX (15 km) Fiber type Single-mode 100BASE-FX (40 km) Single-mode 100BASE-FX (80 km) Single-mode Single-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-BX (10 km) Single-mode 100BASE-BX (40 km) Single-mode

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Working wavelength range (nm)

Specification 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code. -15 to -8 For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code. -3 to 2

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module code

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-28

-34

-34

-28.2

-24

-8 8.2

-10 10

-10 10

-8 6.6

-3 8

34060276

34060281

34060282

For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

For details, see wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 3-44 Wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code Item Optical module code (10 km) Optical module code (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060638 34060639 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Local

Remote

Note: FE/STM1 optical modules 34060638 and 34060639 can also support 1000 Mbit/s rate.

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.49 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 12.0

3.11 TND1EM4T
This section describes the EM4T, which is an interface board with four FE/GE electrical interfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.11.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EM4T is TND1.

3.11.2 Functions and Features


The EM4T mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with the CXP. Table 3-45lists the functions and features of the EM4T. Table 3-45 Functions and features of the EM4T Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports four FE/GE einterfaces. Accesses 4 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with the CXP. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled at the four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Working mode Type of the loopback at the port Auto-Negotiation, 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M Full-Duplex PHY-layer outloop MAC-layer inloop and outloop
57

Interface function

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description Automatic loopback release at the port Supported Supported Supported

LAG

Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Black list and white list of MAC addresses Clock

Supported

Synchronous Ethernet SSM protocol IEEE 1588V2 protocol

Supported Supported Supported

Note: When the interfaces on the front panel work in 10 Mbit/s mode, synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588V2 protocol are not applicable.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The EM4T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-14shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM4T. Figure 3-14 Block diagram for the functions of the EM4T
Backplane 4 x FE/GE signals Service signals

Service access module

Service processing module

Service signals

CXP

Management bus

Management bus

Clock signals

Management module
Management bus

Clock module

Clock signals

CXP CXP

3.3 V 3.0 V Each module on the board 2.5 V 1.2 V

-48 V/-60 V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply

-48 V/-60 V

Transmit Direction
The service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplaneside interface of the EM4T. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding and serial/ parallel conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service access module performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the EM4T and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on the front panel, performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding, and then sends the services to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service processing module, performs coding/decoding, and serial/parallel conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces based on the access capability of the EM4T and the access bandwidth settings at these interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface. In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on the access capability of the EM4T and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module. This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock. This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.

l l

Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM4T.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Provides the working clock for each module on the EM4T. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.

Power Supply Module


This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM4T. l l l l 3.3V 3.0V 2.5V 1.2V

3.11.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the EM4T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-15shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM4T. Figure 3-15 Font panel of the EM4T

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM4T. l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
NOTE

Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service port transmit/receive status indicator (ACT).

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
On the EM4T, 4 interfaces are present. Table 3-46 lists the quantity, types, and usage of the interfaces. The interfaces support auto-adaptation in the case of straight-through cables or crossover cables. For corresponding cables, see 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-46 Interfaces on the EM4T Interface on the Front Panel FE/GE1-FE/GE4 Interface Type RJ-45 Usage FE/GE auto-sensing electrical interface, which is used to access the first and the second channels of Ethernet service signals.

NOTE

When working in GE mode, the interfaces can work only in auto-adaptation mode; when working in FE mode, the interfaces supports auto-adaptation mode, a straight-through mode, and crossover cable mode.

Table 3-47 lists pins of the FE electrical interfaces on the EM4T, and Table 3-48 lists the pins of the GE electrical interfaces on the EM4T. Table 3-47 Pins of the FE electrical interfaces on the EM4T Front View Pin 1
87654321

Description Positive of twisted pair 1 Negative of twisted pair 1 Positive of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified Negative of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 3-48 Pins of the GE electrical interfaces on the EM4T Front View Pin 1
87654321

Description Positive of twisted pair 1 Negative of twisted pair 1 Positive of twisted pair 2 Positive of twisted pair 3 Negative of twisted pair 3 Negative of twisted pair 2 Positive of twisted pair 4
61

2 3 4 5 6 7

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Pin 8

Description Negative of twisted pair 4

3.11.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM4T. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM4T. Ethernet interface For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.11.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the EM4T include the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 3-49 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EM4T. Table 3-49 Specifications of interfaces on the TND1EM4T Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Supports interface rates at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE 802.3.

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.44 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.4

3.12 TND2AQ1
This section describes the TND2AQ1, a 4 x STM-1 ATM service interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.12.1 Version Description


The functional version of the AQ1 board is TND2.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.12.2 Functions and Features


When working with the CXP board, the AQ1 board receives and processes 4 x STM-1 ATM services. Table 3-50 lists the functions and features of the AQ1 board. Table 3-50 Functions and features of the AQ1 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Service interfaces on the front panel Provides four STM-1 ATM optical interfaces.

Detects and queries temperature and voltage, and supports hot plugging. Interfacing function Laser functions Supports automatic shutdown of lasers. Queries laser information. Detects and reports laser-related alarms. Detects and reports laser-related performance events. Port loopback type Inloop Outloop No loopback Automatic loopback release ATM Supported traffic types Supported CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Priority for scheduling ATM connections Number of supported PWs CBR > rtVBR > nrtVBR > UBR+ > UBR Remote services: 256 Local services: 128 Number of supported ATM VP/VC switching connections Waiting time during encapsulation of ATM PW packets
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

1000

Value range: 1000 us to 50000 us. Step: 1000 us. Default value: 1000 us.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the Nto-1 (N32) and 1-to-1 formats. Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenation and non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections that support cell concatenation is 1024 and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. ATM OAM on the UNI side and NNI side Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test. Supports the AIS. Supports the RDI.

Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) Insertion and extraction of S1 bytes

l Supports intra-board and inter-board 1+1/1:1 LMSP. l The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. Supported

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The AQ1 board consists of an ATM access module, an ATM processing module, a data processing module, a management module, a clock module, and a power supply module. Figure 3-16 shows the functional block diagram of the AQ1 board. Figure 3-16 Functional block diagram of the AQ1 board
Backplane 4 x STM-1 ATM signals ATM cells Service signals

ATM access module

ATM cells

ATM processing module

Data processing module

CXP A Service signals CXP B

Management bus

Management bus

Management bus Management bus

Management module

CXP

Clock module
3.3 V

System clock signals

CXP

1.1 V

. . .

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

PIU PIU

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Upstream Direction
In the upstream direction, the AQ1 board receives STM-1 ATM service signals through interfaces on the front panel and sends the signals into its ATM access module. When receiving ATM signals, the ATM access module extracts ATM cells from the signals and sends the ATM cells to the ATM processing module, which performs VP/VC switching for the ATM cells, OAM, and QoS functions such as traffic management, and sends the ATM cells to the data processing module. The data processing module performs PW encapsulation on the ATM cells and sends the ATM cells to the CXP board through the backplane-side interfaces.

Downstream Direction
In the downstream direction, the data processing module receives service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, performs PW decapsulation into ATM cells, and sends the ATM cells to the ATM processing module. The ATM processing module performs ATM OAM and QoS functions such as traffic management, and sends the ATM cells to the ATM access module. The ATM access module maps the ATM cells into SDH signals and sends the SDH signals through the interfaces on the front panel.

ATM Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives 4 x STM1 ATM signals at a rate of 155 Mbit/ s, processes SDH overheads, pointers, and alarms, extracts ATM cells from the SDH signals, extracts the line clock from the ATM cells, and sends the ATM cells to the ATM processing module. In the transmit direction, this module maps the ATM cells that are transmitted from the ATM processing module into SDH signals, processes SDH overheads, pointers, and alarms, and forms SDH frames.

ATM Processing Module


This module performs VP/VC switching for ATM cells, OAM, and QoS functions such traffic management, traffic shaping, and queue scheduling. l In the receive direction, this module determines the traffic priority of ATM cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard ATM cells or to continue transmitting ATM cells according to the traffic priority. If ATM cells need to be further transmitted, this module performs VP/VC switching on ATM cells and sends the ATM cells to the data processing module. In the transmit direction, this module processes packet headers of ATM cells and performs VP/VC switching on ATM cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard ATM cells or to continue transmitting ATM cells. If ATM cells need to be further transmitted, this module sends ATM cells to the ATM access module. Supports back pressure and implements traffic management. Supports F4 OAM and F5 OAM. Supports the connection confirm (CC) test.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

l l

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Supports the loopback (LB) test.

Data Processing Module


This module performs PW encapsulation and decapsulation on packets: l In the receive direction, this module receives ATM cells, performs PW encapsulation on the cells in the concatenation or non-concatenation format, and sends the cells to the processing board through the backplane-side interfaces. In the transmit direction, this module receives PWE3 packets from the backplane-side interfaces, determines the service types of the packets, performs PW decapsulation on the packets to obtain ATM cells, and sends the ATM cells to the ATM processing module.

Management Module
This module performs the following functions: l l Manages and controls other modules on the board. Processes clock signals with the clock module.

Clock Module
This module provides the working clock for other modules on the board.

Power Supply Module


This module provides required voltages for other modules on the board. l l l l l 3.3 V 2.5 V 1.8 V 1.2 V 1.1 V

3.12.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the AQ1 board, there are indicators and four interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-17 shows the front panel of the AQ1 board. Figure 3-17 Front panel of the AQ1 board

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AQ1 board: l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status LOS1 to LOS4 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status

For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the AQ1 board. Table 3-51 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For details on fiber connections to these interfaces, see 7.1.1 Fiber Types. Table 3-51 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AQ1 board Interface on the Front Panel IN1 to IN4 OUT1 to OUT4 Interface Type LC LC Usage Input interface for STM-1 optical signals Output interface for STM-1 optical signals

NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module.

3.12.5 Board Configuration Reference


The AQ1 board can be configured using the U2000. On the U2000, users can set the following parameters for the AQ1 board: l l l l l J0 J1 C2 Automatic laser shutdown SDH interface

For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.12.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the AQ1 board cover interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface Specifications
Table 3-52 lists the technical specifications for the interfaces on the AQ1 board. Table 3-52 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520

Two-fiber bidirectional interface I-1 (2km) S-1.1 (15 km) Singlemode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Singlemode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Singlemode 1480 to 1580

Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Singlemode For details, see wavelengt h allocation of singlefiber bidirection al optical interface and related optical module code. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Singlemode For details, see wavelengt h allocation of singlefiber bidirection al optical interface and related optical module code. -3 to 2

Fiber type Working wavelengt h range (nm)

Multimode 1270 to 1380

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

20 to 14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

30

-28

-34

-34

-28.2

-24

14

-8

-10

-10

-8

-3

10

8.2

10

10

6.6

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Optical module code

Specification 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282 For details, see wavelengt h allocation of singlefiber bidirection al optical interface and related optical module code. For details, see wavelengt h allocation of singlefiber bidirection al optical interface and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels. The optical module with the BOM number of 34060287 supports the query of only manufacturer information, but not the power, bias current, temperature performance, or alarm information.

Table 3-53 Wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and related optical module code Item Optical module code (15 km) Optical module code (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060638 34060639 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364

Other Specifications
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D) Weight (kg): 0.58kg Power consumption (W): 23.00W

3.13 TND1SQ1
This section describes the TND1SQ1, 4 channels STM-1 service interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.13.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SQ1 board is TND1.

3.13.2 Functions and Features


When working with the CXP board, the SQ1 board receives and processes 4 channels STM-1 (VC3/VC4) signals. Table 3-54 lists the functions and features of the SQ1. Table 3-54 Functions and features of the SQ1 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Service interfaces on the front panel Provides four STM-1(VC3/VC4) optical interfaces.

Detects and queries temperature and voltage, and supports hot plugging. Supports the SDH/SONET mode configuration. Interfacing function Laser functions Supports automatic shutdown of lasers. Queries laser information. Detects and reports laser-related alarms. Detects and reports laser-related performance events. Port loopback type Inloop Outloop No loopback (Default type) Automatic loopback release Supported Loopback can be automatically released at specified time. CES Simulation service types VC4 STS-3C VC3 STS-1 Maximum service count Local services: 2 Remote services: 4

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description Transparent transmission of SDH/SONET section overheads Transparent transmission of higher order POH Remote loopback and PRBS test Detects a power-off notice of a remote device and Reports alarm. Supported

Supported Supported Supported

Supports setting of jitter buffer time for CES services. Users can set the jitter buffer time within the range of 0.125 ms to 16 ms at a step length of 0.125 ms (it is 1 ms by default). Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) Insertion and extraction of S1 bytes l Supports intra-board and inter-board 1+1/1:1 LMSP. l The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. Supported

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The SQ1 board consists of an SDH processing module, a logic processing module, a data processing module, a management module, a clock module, and a power supply module. Figure 3-18 shows the functional block diagram of the SQ1 board. Figure 3-18 Functional block diagram of the SQ1 board
Backplane 4 xSTM-1(VC3/VC4)signals

SDH processing module

Service signal

Logic processing module

Service signal

Service signals

Data processing module

CXP A Service signals CXP B

Management bus

Management bus

Management bus Management bus

Management module

CXP

Clock module
3.3 V

System clock signals

CXP

1.0 V

. . .

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

PIU PIU

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Upstream Direction
In the upstream direction, the SQ1 board receives 4 channels STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals through interfaces on the front panel and sends the signals into its SDH processing module. When receiving the SDH signals, the SDH processing module recovers the clock data, aligns frames, processes section overheads, interprets the higher order pointers, regenerates pointers, and processes higher order overheads. Then the SDH processing module sends the signals to the higher order cross-connect module, which processes and sends the signals to the logic processing module. The logic processing module determines the service signal type based on CPU configurations. For VC-4 or STS-3C signals, the logic processing module transparently transmits them to the data processing module over the bus. For VC-3 or STS-1 signals, the logic processing module demaps the signals in the bus, processes and regenerates pointers, processes higher order overheads , then maps the signals into VC4,converts AU3 signals to TUG3 signals. Afterwards, the logic processing module sends the signals to the data processing module over the bus. The data processing module encapsulates the signals in PWE3, schedules PWs, and sends the signals to CXP through the backplane-side interfaces.

Downstream Direction
In the downstream direction, the board performs the reverse process. The data processing module receives service signals from CXP, determines the service signal type, decapsulates signals from PWE3, and sends the signals to the logic processing module. The logic processing module processes different types of signals in different ways. For VC-4 or STS-3S signals, the logic processing module converts TUG3 signals to AU3 signals, and sends the signals to the SDH processing module. For VC-3 signals, the logic processing module directly transparently transits them to the SDH processing module. When receiving the signals, the SDH processing module frames VC-3 or VC-4 signals, adds overheads and pointers, processes alarms, and finally sends STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals to other boards through the interfaces on the front panel.

SDH Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module recovers clock or data from the received 4 channels STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals, align frames, descrambles signals, processes SOHs, adjusts pointers, processes POHs. Then it sends the signals to the logic processing module over a bus for further processing. In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from the logic processing module, reframes VC-3 or VC-4 signals, adds overheads and pointers, processes alarms, and sends 4 channels STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals to other boards through the interfaces on the front panel. This module performs LMSP protection switching to protect services against failures. This module extracts and recovers the line clock.

l l

logic Processing Module


This module performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

In the receive direction, this module receives service signals from the SDH processing module, and determines the service signal type based on CPU configurations. For VC-4 or STS-3C signals, this module transparently transmits them to the data processing module over the bus. For VC-3 or STS-1 signals, it demaps the signals in the bus, processes and regenerates pointers, and maps the signals into VC-4s. Finally, this module sends the signals to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives signals from the data processing module, processes the signals, and sends the signals to the SDH processing module.

Data Processing Module


This module performs the following functions. l In the receive direction, this module obtains PW information about the service, encapsulates signals in PWE3, schedules PWs, and sends the signals to CXP through the backplane-side interfaces. In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from CXP, determines the service signal type, decapsulates PWE3 signals, and schedules the signals.

Management Module
This module works with CXP to manage and control other modules on the board.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l Recovers the line clock. Receives the system clock from CXP and provides the working clock for each module on the board. Supports the synchronization status message (SSM) protocol.

Power Supply Module


This module provides required voltages for other modules on the board. l l l l l l 3.3 V 3.0 V 2.5 V 1.5 V 1.2 V 1.0 V

3.13.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the SQ1 board, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-19 shows the front panel of the SQ1 board.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-19 Front panel of the SQ1 board

Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the SQ1 board: l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status LOS1 to LOS4 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status

For details on meanings of the indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the SQ1 board. Table 3-55 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For details on fiber connections to these interfaces, see 7.1.1 Fiber Types. Table 3-55 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SQ1 board Interface on the Front Panel IN1 to IN4 OUT1 to OUT4 Interface Type LC LC Usage Input interface for STM-1 (VC3/VC4) optical signals Output interface for STM-1 (VC3/VC4) optical signals

NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module.

3.13.5 Board Configuration Reference


The SQ1 board can be configured using the U2000. On the U2000, users can set the following parameters for the SQ1 board: l l l l l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

J0 J1 C2 Automatic laser shutdown SDH interface


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

l l

Working mode Pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) test


NOTE

In transparent transmission mode, the "J1 to be Sent([Mode]Content)" of "Trace Byte J1" and the "Signal Flag C2" do not apply and no alarm is reported.

For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.13.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the SQ1 board cover interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Interface Specifications
Table 3-56 lists the technical specifications for the STM-1 optical interfaces on the SQ1 board. Table 3-56 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Single-mode For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code. -3 to 2

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm)


Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-28

-34

-34

-28.2

-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module code

Specification -8 -10 -10 -8 -3

8.2

10

10

6.6

34060276

34060281

34060282

For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code.

For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 3-57 Wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and related optical module code Item Optical module code (15 km) Optical module code (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060638 34060639 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364

Other Specifications
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D) Weight (kg): 0.53kg Power consumption (W): 11.50W

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.14 TND1CQ1B
This section describes the TND1CQ1B, which is a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.14.1 Version Description


The functional version of the CQ1B is TND2.

3.14.2 Functions and Features


The CQ1B, which is used with the CXP, accesses and processes 4 x channelized STM-1 services, and supports the intra-board LMSP protection. The CQ1B supports the CES protocols. Table 3-58 lists functions and features of the CQ1B. Table 3-58 Functions and features of the CQ1B Function and Feature Basic function DCN Remarks Service interfaces on the front panel Supports four channelized STM-1 optical interfaces.

All the VC-12 timeslots of each interface support the DCN function. By default, the DCN function of only the first, seventeenth, thirtythird, and forty-ninth VC-12 timeslots of each optical interface can be enabled. Manually enables or disables the DCN function of the VC-12 timeslots of the optical interface on the board.

PRBS Interface function

Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of a VC12 timeslot in the receive/transmit direction. Automatic shutdown function of the laser at the port Type of the loopback at the port Supported

Inloop at an STM-1 port Outloop at an STM-1 port Inloop in a VC-12 channel Outloop in a VC-12 channel

Automatic loopback release at the port ATM/IMA Number of supported ATM E1 services Number of supported IMA groups
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Supported 128 32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Remarks Maximum number of VC-12 timeslots or serial ports in each IMA group 32

Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMA group protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA group members. Supported traffic type CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Number of supported ATM connections (VPC and VCC included) Number of supported ATM services 256 1024 remote connections 512 local connections

Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N 32) or 1-to-1 format. Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and nonconcatenation modes. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. ATM OAM on the UNI side and NNI side CES Number of supported CES services Supported emulation mode Supports the CC test Supports the LB test. 252 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/ s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth. Supported clock mode Retiming mode

The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set. The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Remarks The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. The encapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.25 ms to 3 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms.

ML-PPP

Number of supported MLPPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group

64 16

Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface to access IP packets of the L3VPN services. LMSP protection Extraction and insertion of the S1 byte SSM protocol Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection schemes. Supported

Supported

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The CQ1B consists of the SDH processing module, line processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-20 shows the block diagram for working principle of the CQ1B. Figure 3-20 Block diagram for the working principle of the CQ1B
Backplane
4 x STM-1 Service signal Service signal Service signal

SDH processing module

Line processing module

Data processing module

CXP

Management bus

Management bus

Management bus Management bus

Management module

CXP

Line clocks Line clocks

Clock module

CXP CXP

System clocks

3.3V . . . 1.0V

. . .

Power supply module

-48V/-60V -48V/-60V

System power supply System power supply

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Receive Direction
In the receive direction, the SDH processing module accesses 4 x channelized STM-1 services through the interface on the front panel. This module decapsulates the VC-12 timeslots from the STM-1 signals, recovers the E1 signals, processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm signals, and sends the processed signals to the line processing module. Then, the line processing module rearranges the E1 frames, processes the rearranged signals, and sends the signals to the data processing module for PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling. Finally, the signals are sent to the CXP through the interface on the backplane.

Transmit Direction
In the transmit direction, the data processing module receives the signals from the CXP, identifies the signals, performs the PWE3 decapsulation, and then sends the signals to the line processing module. The line processing module processes various signals, schedules queues, and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module. The SDH processing module maps the E1 signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots to the STM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sends out the STM-1 signals through the interface on the front panel.

SDH Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module accesses 4 x channelized STM-1 signals, decapsulates the VC-12 timeslots from the STM-1 signals, obtains the E1 signals by demapping the VC-12 timeslots, and processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm signals. In the transmit direction, this module receives the E1 signals from the line processing module, maps the signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots to STM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sends out the 4 x channelized STM-1 signals through the interface on the backplane. When the service fails, this module realizes the LMSP protection. Thus, the service is switched. This module extracts and recovers the line clocks.

l l

Line Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the SDH processing module, rearranges the frames of the E1 signals, performs processing for various services such as setup and deletion of the IMA link, creation of the ML-PPP group, extraction of protocol packets in the ML-PPP services, and suppression of timeslots of the CES services. Then, the processed signals are sent to the data processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the data processing module, and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module.

Data Processing Module


This module performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

In the receive direction, this module obtains the corresponding PW channel information of each E1 service, performs the PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the processed signals to the CXP through the interface on the backplane. In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the CXP, and performs the PWE3 decapsulation and service scheduling. In the case of the ATM E1 or IMA services, this module performs the VP/VC switching for the ATM cells, and processes the concatenated cells during the PWE3 encapsulation or decapsulation.

l l

Management Module
When used with the CXP, this module manages and controls each module on the CQ1B.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l Processes the line clocks. Accesses and processes the system clock from the CXP, and provides the working clock to each module on the CQ1B. Supports the SSM protocol.

Power Supply Module


This module performs the following functions: l l Accesses two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies. Supplies the working power for each module on the CQ1B.

3.14.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the CQ1B, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-21 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CQ1B. Figure 3-21 Appearance of the front panel of the CQ1B

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CQ1B: l
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

l l

SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status LOS1 and LOS4 indicators, red, green, which indicate the port status

For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
Table 3-59 lists the amount, types, and usage of the interfaces on the CQ1B. Table 3-59 Interfaces on the CQ1B Interface on the Front Panel IN1 to IN4 OUT1 to OUT4 Interface Type LC LC Usage Corresponding Fiber For details, see 7.1.1 Fiber Types.

This interface is used as an input interface for the STM-1 optical signal. This interface is used as an output interface for the STM-1 optical signal.

NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module.

3.14.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CQ1B. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the CQ1B. l l l l l l l l J0 J1 J2 C2 V5 SDH interface Automatic laser shutdown Spare timeslot recovery value

For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.14.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the CQ1B cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, and weight. For the technical specifications of the CQ1B, see Table 3-60.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-60 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Single-mode For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code. -3 to 2

Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-28

-34

-34

-28.2

-24

-8

-10

-10

-8

-3

8.2

10

10

6.6

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Optical module code

Specification 34060276 34060281 34060282 For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code. For details, see wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and related optical module code.

NOTE For details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 3-61 Wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and related optical module code Item Optical module code (15 km) Optical module code (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060638 34060639 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.53 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.5

3.15 TND3ML1A/TND3ML1B
This section describes the ML1A/ML1B, a 16-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
NOTE

The mapping impedance of an interface on the ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interface on the ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of the ML1A and ML1B are the same.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.15.1 Version Description


The function version of the ML1A/ML1B is TND3.

3.15.2 Functions and Features


The ML1A/ML1B is an E1 interface board. The ML1A/ML1B must be used with the system control board to access and process 16 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the ML1A/ML1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and MLPPP are supported. Table 3-62 lists the functions and features of the ML1A/ML1B. Table 3-62 Functions and features of the ML1A/ML1B Function and Feature Basic functions DCN Remarks Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals and supports the ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols. Supports the in-band DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled at the first and the sixteenth E1 ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/ ML-PPP port. Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 port in the receive/transmit direction. Number of supported IMA groups /supported ATM E1 services Maximum number of E1 links or 64 kbit/s level serial ports in each IMA group 16 16

Interface functions Fractional E1 PRBS ATM/IMA

Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMA group protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA group members. Supported traffic types CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Remarks Number of supported ATM connections (VPC and VCC included) Number of supported ATM services 64 256 remote connections 128 local connections

Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N32) or 1-to-1 format. Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and non-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. ATM OAM on the UNI side and NNI side CES Number of supported CES services Supported emulation mode Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test. 16 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth. Supported clock modes Retiming mode

The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set. The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms. The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. The encapsulation buffer time ranges from ms to 3 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms. ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group 7 16

Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface to access IP packets of the L3VPN services.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The ML1A/ML1B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-22 shows the functional block diagram of the ML1A/ML1B. Figure 3-22 Functional block diagram of the ML1A/ML1B
Backplane 16 x E1 Service access module Service signal Management bus Service processing module Service signal CXP

Line clocks

Management module

Management bus

CXP

Clock module

3.3V .
. .

-48V/-60V
. . .

1V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply CXP CXP

-48V/-60V System clocks

Line clocks

Transmit Direction
The service signals from the system control board are sent to the service processing module. The service processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the service signals, processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, performs the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module. The service access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs the signals through the backplane-side interfaces.

Receive Direction
The board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signals are sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation, lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and then sends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing module performs E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuits against transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internal
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

impedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals. Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module. l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the service processing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signals through the backplane-side interfaces. This module recovers the line clock.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access module and performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals, processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (for example, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching and concatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of MLPPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally, this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signals to the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces. In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then, this module performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes the service signals, and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service access module.

Management Module
This module manages and controls each module on the board.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l When used with the system control board, processes the recovered line clock. Provides the working clock for each module on the board.

Power Supply Module


This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module on the board.

3.15.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearances of the Front Panel


Figure 3-23 shows the appearances of the front panel of the ML1A and ML1B.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-23 Front panels of the ML1A and the ML1B

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B: l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B. Table 3-63 lists the type and usage of the interfaces. 7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces. Table 3-63 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B Interface on the Front Panel 1 to 16 Interface Type Usage ML1A ML1B

Anea 96

75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the first to sixteenth channels of E1 services.

120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the first to sixteenth channels of E1 services.

Table 3-64 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-64 Pins of the Anea 96 interface Front View Connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Usage Rx1

Connector Pin 25 26

Usage Tx1

Rx2

27 28

Tx2

Rx3

29 30

Tx3

Rx4

31 32

Tx4

Rx5

33 34

Tx5

Rx6

35 36

Tx6

Rx7

37 38

Tx7

Rx8

39 40

Tx8

Rx9

41 42

Tx9

R x 10

43 44

T x 10

R x 11

45 46

T x 11

R x 12

47 48

T x 12

R x 13

73 74

T x 13

R x 14

75 76

T x 14

R x 15

77

T x 15
90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Connector Pin 54 55 56

Usage

Connector Pin 78

Usage

R x 16

79 80

T x 16

3.15.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the ML1A/ML1B. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the ML1A/ML1B: l l PDH interface PRBS Test

For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.15.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the ML1A/ML1B include the interface specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 3-65 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the ML1A/ML1B. Table 3-65 Specifications of the interfaces on the ML1A/ML1B Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface impedance Specification Requirement 2048 75 ohms (ML1A) 120 ohms (ML1B) Interface code Pulse waveform at the output interface Attenuation tolerance of the input interface at the point with a frequency of 1024 kHz (dB) Anti-interference capability of the input interface Input jitter tolerance Output jitter HDB3 Complies with ITU-T G.703 0 to 6 Complies with ITU-T G.703 Complies with ITU-T G.823 Complies with ITU-T G.823

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.44
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power consumption (W, room temperature): 9.5

3.16 TND2MD1A/TND2MD1B
This section describes the MD1A/MD1B, a 32-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
NOTE

The mapping impedance of an interface on the MD1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interface on the MD1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of the MD1A and MD1B are the same.

3.16.1 Version Description


The functional version of the MD1A/MD1B is TND2.

3.16.2 Functions and Features


The MD1A/MD1B is an E1 interface board. The MD1A/MD1B must be used with the system control board to access and process 32 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and MLPPP are supported. Table 3-66 lists the functions and features of the MD1A/MD1B. Table 3-66 Functions and features of the MD1A/MD1B Function and Feature Basic functions DCN Remarks Accesses and processes 32 x E1 signals and supports the ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols. Supports the in-band DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled at the first and the thirty-second E1 ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually. Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/ ML-PPP port. Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 port in the receive/transmit direction. Number of supported IMA groups /supported ATM E1 services Maximum number of E1 links or 64 kbit/s level serial ports in each IMA group
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Interface functions Fractional E1 PRBS ATM/IMA

32

16a

92

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Remarks Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMA group protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA group members. Supported traffic types CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Number of supported ATM connections (VPC and VCC included) Number of supported ATM services 64 512 remote connections 256 local connections

Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N32) or 1-to-1 format. Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and non-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. ATM OAM on the UNI side and NNI side CES Number of supported CES services Supported emulation mode Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test. 32 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth. Supported clock modes Retiming mode Self-adaptation mode The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set. The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms. The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. The encapsulation buffer time ranges from ms to 3 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature ML-PPP

Remarks Number of supported ML-PPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group 7 16b

Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface to access IP packets of the L3VPN services.
NOTE a: In the case of the MD1A/MD1B, the links and 64 kbit/s timeslots corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1 ports cannot be bundled to an IMA group. If the former 16 E1 ports and the latter 16 E1 ports are configured in two different IMA groups, an ATM aggregation service from the two IMA groups to a PW is not allowed. a: In the case of the MD1A/MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1 ports cannot be bundled to an ML-PPP group.

3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The MD1A/MD1B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 3-24 shows the functional block diagram of the MD1A/MD1B. Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the MD1A/MD1B
Backplane 32 x E1 Service access module Service signal Management bus Service processing module Service signal CXP

Line clocks

Management module

Management bus

CXP

Clock module

3.3V .
. .

-48V/-60V
. . .

1V

Power supply module

System power supply System power supply CXP CXP

-48V/-60V System clocks

Line clocks

Transmit Direction
The service signals from the system control board are sent to the service processing module. The service processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the service signals, processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols,
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

performs the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module. The service access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs the signals through the backplane-side interfaces.

Receive Direction
The board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signals are sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation, lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and then sends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing module performs E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces.

Service Access Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuits against transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internal impedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals. Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the service processing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signals through the backplane-side interfaces. This module recovers the line clock.

Service Processing Module


This module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access module and performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals, processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (for example, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching and concatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of MLPPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally, this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signals to the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces. In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then, this module performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes the service signals,and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service access module.

Management Module
This module manages and controls each module on the board.

Clock Module
This module performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

l l

When used with the system control board, processes the recovered line clock. Provides the working clock for each module on the board.

Power Supply Module


This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module on the board.

3.16.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearances of the Front Panel


Figure 3-25 shows the appearances of the front panel of the MD1A and the MD1B. Figure 3-25 Front panels of the MD1A and the MD1B

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B: l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status

For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.

Interfaces
There are two Anea 96 interfaces on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B. Table 3-67 lists the type and usage of the interfaces. 7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-67 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B Interfac e on the Front Panel 1 to 16 Interfac e Type Usage MD1A MD1B

Anea 96

75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the first to sixteenth channels of E1 services. 75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the seventeenth to thirty-second channels of E1 services.

120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the first to sixteenth channels of E1 services. 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the seventeenth to thirty-second channels of E1 services.

17 to 32

Anea 96

Table 3-68 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface. Table 3-68 Pins of the Anea 96 interface Front View Connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Rx8 Rx7 Rx6 Rx5 Rx4 Rx3 Rx2 Usage Rx1 Connector Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Tx8 Tx7 Tx6 Tx5 Tx4 Tx3 Tx2 Usage Tx1

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front View

Connector Pin 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Usage Rx9

Connector Pin 41 42

Usage Tx9

R x 10

43 44

T x 10

R x 11

45 46

T x 11

R x 12

47 48

T x 12

R x 13

73 74

T x 13

R x 14

75 76

T x 14

R x 15

77 78

T x 15

R x 16

79 80

T x 16

3.16.5 Board Configuration Reference


You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the MD1A/MD1B. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the MD1A/MD1B: l l PDH interface PRBS Test

For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.

3.16.6 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the MD1A/MD1B include the interface specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 3-69 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-69 Specifications of the interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface impedance Specification Requirement 2048 75 ohms (MD1A) 120 ohms (MD1B) Interface code Pulse waveform at the output interface Attenuation tolerance of the input interface at the point with a frequency of 1024 kHz (dB) Anti-interference capability of the input interface Input jitter tolerance Output jitter HDB3 Complies with ITU-T G.703 0 to 6

Complies with ITU-T G.703 Complies with ITU-T G.823 Complies with ITU-T G.823

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) Weight (kg): 0.49 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 12.1

3.17 TND1PIU
This section describes the TND1PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.17.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PIU is TND1.

3.17.2 Functions and Features


The PIU, a power access board, supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, surge protection detection, and information reporting. Table 3-70 lists functions and features of the PIU.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-70 Functions and features of the PIU Function and Feature Power access Power protection Description Each of the two PIU accesses one -48 V DC (or -60 V DC) power supply for the equipment. The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and short circuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shocking boards and components on them. The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection fails. Two PIU can achieve 1+1 hot backup. One PIU is capable of supplying power for the entire chassis.

surge protection Power backup

3.17.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The PIU mainly consists of the lighting protection and failure detection module, communication unit module, and board in-position module. Figure 3-26 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU. Figure 3-26 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU
Backplane -48 V/-60 V Lightning protection and failure detection module
Inter-board communication bus

Each board

Lightning protection failure alarm signals

Communication unit module Board in-position module


Board in-position signals

CXP

CXP
Slot ID signals

Slot ID module

CXP

NOTE

In Figure 3-26, the CXP on the backplane indicates the system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board. For OptiX PTN 960, the CXP indicates the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.

Lighting Protection and Failure Detection Module


This module protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the anti-lightning circuit. If the surge protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to the TND3CXPA/ TND3CXPB.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Communication Unit Module


This module has the function of reporting the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm signals about the surge protection failure.

Slot ID Module
This module reports the slot ID information to the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.

Board In-Position Module


This module reports the board in-position signals to the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.

3.17.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, a label and power supply interfaces..

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-27 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. Figure 3-27 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU

Indicators
The following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU. PWR, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWR is on and green, it indicates that power is accessed. For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interfaces
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-71 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU and their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 7.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable. Table 3-71 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU Interface on the Front Panel NEG(-) RTN(+) Usage -48 V power input interface BGND power input interface

Label
Operation warning label: indicates the following precaution, which should be taken for removal or insertion of the PIU board.

CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment, make sure that these power supplies are disabled. Do not remove or insert the board with power on.

3.17.5 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 3-72 lists the technical specifications of the PIU. Table 3-72 Technical specifications of the PIU Item Board dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W, room temperature) Input voltage (V) Technical Specification 41.4 (H) x 229.9 (D) x 21.0 (W) 0.12 0.5 -38.4 to -72.0

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.18 TND1FAN
This section describes the TND1FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.

3.18.1 Version Description


The functional version of the FAN is TND1.

3.18.2 Functions and Features


The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans. The functions and features of the FAN are as follows: l l l l l Accesses two 12 V power supplies for driving six fans that each consumes 6 W power. Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and filters the lower frequency. Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system. Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version number, and board in-position information. Provides alarm indicators.

3.18.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


The FAN mainly consists of the combiner/start-delay module, filter module, communication unit module, intelligent fan speed adjustment module, and board in-position module. Figure 3-28 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-28 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN
Fans x 6 12 V 12 V
12 V

Filter module 12 V

Start-delay

Combiner

CXP CXP

Combiner/ 12 V soft-start module 12 V power shut signals Communication unit module

Inter-board communication bus

CXP

Fan speed reporting module

Fan rotating speed signals CXP

PWM signals

PWM driver module

CXP

Intelligent fan speed adjustment module Board in-position module Fan in-position signals

CXP

Start-delay/Combiner Module
This module provides start delay to the combined two 12 V power supplies and protecting fans against overcurrent.

Filter Module
This module filters the LC low frequency to enhance the EMC feature of the system.

Communication Unit Module


This module reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version, and environment temperature information. In addition, this module provides 12 V power shut signals to the startdelay module.

Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Module


This module reports information about the fan rotating speed to the CXP and adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the six pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals received from the CXP. The PWM signal of one fan is isolated from that of another.

Board In-Position Module


This module reports the board in-position signals to the CXP.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.18.4 Front Panel


On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 3-29 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN. Figure 3-29 Appearance of the front panel of the FAN

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN: l l l l FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans. CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms. MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms. MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms.

The CRIT, MAJ, and MIN indicators on the front panel of the FAN indicate the current alarm severity of the chassis. For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

3 Boards

ESD Wrist Strap Jack


The ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body.

Handle
The handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during board replacement.

Label
The following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN: l l ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating.

3.18.5 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 3-73 lists the technical specifications of the FAN. Table 3-73 Technical specifications of the FAN Item Board dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Technical Specification 86.2 (H) x 217.6 (D) x 28.5 (W) 0.302 l Low rate: 4.1 l Medium rate: 13.6 l High rate: 29.6 Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

4 Filler Panel

4
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis. 4.2 Appearance and Valid Slots There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.

Filler Panel

4.1 Functions and Features A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances, and ensure proper ventilation.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

4 Filler Panel

4.1 Functions and Features


A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances, and ensure proper ventilation. Main functions of a filler panel are as follows: l l l l Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement of electromagnetic radiation. Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis. Prevents internal circuit from being exposed. Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis.

4.2 Appearance and Valid Slots


There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.

Appearance
Figure 4-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel. Figure 4-1 Appearance of a filler panel

Valid Slots
A filler panel can be housed in any of slots 1-6 of a chassis.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

5 Pluggable Optical Modules

5
About This Chapter

Pluggable Optical Modules

Optical interface boards for the OptiX PTN 960 use the enhanced small form-factor pluggable (eSFP) optical module and the 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical module. The eSFP and XFP optical modules, which are protocol-independent optical transceivers applicable to optical communication, implement O/E and E/O conversion for signals, and support query of information such as the transceiver performance and manufacturer. 5.1 Appearance and Application The appearances and application scenarios of the eSFP and XFP optical modules are different. 5.2 Optical Module Labels Optical module labels, attached to the optical modules, are used to distinguish different types of optical modules.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

5 Pluggable Optical Modules

5.1 Appearance and Application


The appearances and application scenarios of the eSFP and XFP optical modules are different.

Appearance
Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the eSFP optical module; Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the XFP optical module. Figure 5-1 Appearance example of the eSFP optical module

Two-fiber bidirectional optical module

Single-fiber bidirectional optical module

Figure 5-2 Appearance example of the XFP optical module

Application
lists the boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable. Table 5-1 Boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable Board Type GE optical interface board FE optical interface board STM-1 optical interface board
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Board Name EM4F, EM8F EM4F, EM8F CQ1B, AQ1, SQ1


110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

5 Pluggable Optical Modules

The XFP optical module is applicable to the 10GE optical interface board EX1.

5.2 Optical Module Labels


Optical module labels, attached to the optical modules, are used to distinguish different types of optical modules. Figure 5-3 shows the optical module labels. Figure 5-3 Optical module label
Optical module code

As shown in Table 5-2, different types of optical modules have different codes. Table 5-2 Codes and types of optical modules Optical Module Code 34060313 Optical Interface Type 10GBASE-LR (10 km) 34060322 10GBASE-ER (40 km) 34060361 10GBASE-ZR (80 km) 34060547 10GBASECWDM (70 km) 34060548 10GBASECWDM (70 km) 34060549 10GBASECWDM (70 km) Optical Transceiver XFP, 1511 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km Optical Transceiver XFP, 1491 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km Optical Module Basic Information Optical Transceiver, XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 10.71 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Optical Transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Optical Transceiver XFP, 1471 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km TND1EX1 Mapping Board TND1EX1

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

5 Pluggable Optical Modules

Optical Module Code 34060550

Optical Interface Type 10GBASECWDM (70 km)

Optical Module Basic Information Optical Transceiver XFP, 1531 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km

Mapping Board

34060551

10GBASECWDM (70 km)

Optical Transceiver XFP, 1551 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km

34060552

10GBASECWDM (70 km)

Optical Transceiver XFP, 1571 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km

34060553

10GBASECWDM (70 km)

Optical Transceiver XFP, 1591 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km

34060554

10GBASECWDM (70 km)

Optical Transceiver XFP, 1611 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km

34060286

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/ s (Multi rate), LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

TND1EM4F TND1EM8F

34060473

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

34060298

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

34060360

1000BASE-ZX (80 km)

34060483

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

TND1EM4F TND1EM8F

34060481

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060479

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1511 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060482

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

5 Pluggable Optical Modules

Optical Module Code 34060478

Optical Interface Type 1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical Module Basic Information Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1551 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

Mapping Board

34060476

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1571 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060477

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1591 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060480

1000BASECWDM (80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1611 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060295

1000BASE-X (100 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ s, LC, Single-mode, 100 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km

TND1EM4F TND1EM8F TND1EM4F TND1EM8F TND1CQ1B TND2AQ1 TND1SQ1

34060276

100BASE-FX /S-1.1 (15 km)

34060281

100BASE-FX /L-1.1 (40 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km

34060282

100BASE-FX /L-1.2 (80 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060287

SFP-FE-SXMM1310 (2km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310nm, STM1, LC, Multi-mode, 2km

TND2AQ1 TND1SQ1 TND1CQ1B

34060475

1000BASE-BX (10 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km

TND1EM4F TND1EM8F

34060470

1000BASE-BX (10 km)

34060539

1000BASE-BX (40 km)

34060540

1000BASE-BX (40 km)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

5 Pluggable Optical Modules

Optical Module Code 34060595

Optical Interface Type 1000BASE-BX (80 km)

Optical Module Basic Information Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1570 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1570 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km

Mapping Board TND1EM4F TND1EM8F

34060596

1000BASE-BX (80 km)

34060364

100BASE-BX (10km)

TND1EM4F TND1EM8F TND1D1CQ1B TND1SQ1

34060363

100BASE-BX (10km)

34060639

100BASE-BX (40km)

34060638

100BASE-BX (40km)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

About This Chapter


This section describes the EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply system in terms of the appearance, functions, front panel, and technical specifications. 6.1 Structure and Functions The EPS30-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and converts the power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 960. When input of the 220 V/110 V AC power stops, the EPS30-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery, which provides power to the equipment. This ensures uninterrupted power supply to the equipment. The EPS30-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and AC/DC power distribution frame. 6.2 Front Panel On the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF, there are indicators, interfaces, and output branch fuses. 6.3 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF cover the input/output voltage, current, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

6.1 Structure and Functions


The EPS30-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and converts the power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 960. When input of the 220 V/110 V AC power stops, the EPS30-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery, which provides power to the equipment. This ensures uninterrupted power supply to the equipment. The EPS30-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and AC/DC power distribution frame.

Structure
Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the EPS30-4815AF and Table 6-1 lists the components of the EPS30-4815AF. Figure 6-1 Appearance of the EPS30-4815AF

CAUTION
The interface DB50 on the monitoring module is reserved. Do not use the interface on the monitoring module; otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF will be reset or damaged.

Table 6-1 Components of the EPS30-4815AF Component Rectifier modules Description Converts AC power to DC power. The EPS30-4815AF can be configured with one or two rectifier modules.
116

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

Component Monitoring module

Description Monitors the EPS30-4815AF and storage batteries. Two RS232/ RS485 communication interfaces are provided and one DB50 interface is reserved. Provides an interface for inputting AC power, two load interfaces, and an interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and the fuses that can be replaced.

AC/DC power distribution frame

Functions
Functions of the EPS30-4815AF are as follows: l l Provides an interface for inputting AC power to provide 220 V/110 V AC power to the equipment. Provides two hot-pluggable rectifier modules to convert AC power to DC power. The two rectifier modules work at the same time in load-sharing mode and they are hot backups for each other. The EPS30-4815AF is configured with one or two rectifier modules. When one rectifier module is configured, the maximum output current is 15 A; when two rectifier modules are configured, the maximum output current is 30 A.
NOTE

A filler panel must be inserted into an empty slot intended for a rectifier module.

Provides an active and a standby RS232/RS485 communication interfaces, enables the device to monitor the AC input status of the EPS304815 power supply system, and reserves one DB50 interface for later extension of the monitoring function. Provides two load interfaces for outputting -53.5 V DC power to two PIUs, which provide power to the OptiX PTN 960. Provides two load control fuses, that is, FU-1 with a fuse capacity of 10 A and FU-2 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. These fuses enable/disable output of the load and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the load. Provides one interface for connecting to a group of storage batteries. When working normally, the EPS30-4815AF is charging the storage batteries. When input of the 220 V/ 110 V AC power stops, the storage batteries provide power to the OptiX PTN 960. This ensures uninterrupted power supply to the OptiX PTN 960. Figure 6-2 shows the appearance of a storage battery and Figure 6-3 shows a storage battery tray with storage batteries.

l l

Provides a storage battery protection fuse, that is, FU-3 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. This fuse enables/disables the storage batteries and provides overload and short-circuit protection for the storage batteries.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

Figure 6-2 Appearance of a storage battery

Figure 6-3 Appearance of a storage battery tray with storage batteries


Storage battery

Tray

6.2 Front Panel


On the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF, there are indicators, interfaces, and output branch fuses.

Appearance of the Front Panel


Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF. Figure 6-4 Appearance of the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

Indicators
Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF. Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 list the indications of indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules respectively. Table 6-2 Indicators for the rectifier modules Indicator RUN ALM Indication Running indicator Protection indicator Color Green Yellow Normal State On Off Abnormal State Off On Blinking FAULT Fault indicator Red Off On Cause of Exception The rectifier modules are running normally. A fault that can be rectified occurs on a rectifier module. Communication on a rectifier module is interrupted. A fault that cannot be rectified occurs on a rectifier module.

Note 1: When a severe fault occurs, the indicator (red) is on and the indicators (yellow and green) are off. The indicators (yellow and green) are on only when the indicator (red) is off. Note 2: The indicator (yellow) is always on when communication on a rectifier module is interrupted, a rectifier module is overheated or endures overcurrent or undercurrent, or a rectifier module is disabled.

Table 6-3 Indicators for the monitoring module Indicat or RUN Indicatio n Running indicator Color Green Normal State Blinking at 1s internals Abnorm al State Off Blinking at 125 ms internals On Cause of Exception The monitoring module is running abnormally. Abnormal communication

ALM

Alarm indicator

Red

Off

The EPS30-4815AF reports an alarm.

Interfaces
Table 6-4 lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

Table 6-4 Interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces 1 2 Interface Type Description Remarks

AC INPUT RS232/RS485

RJ-45

220 V/110 V AC power input interface RS232/RS485 communication interfaces. The monitoring module communicates with the equipment, reports alarms, and implements remote control through these interfaces. The interface on the left is the active interface and the interface on the right is the standby interface. The active and standby interfaces cannot be used at the same time.

It is recommended to use the active interface.

COM

DB50

The monitoring module is connected to various sensors through the COM interface. Output interface for load 1 Output interface for load 2 Interface for connecting to the storage batteries

Reserved interface

LOAD1 LOAD2 BATT

1 1 1

LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC power for two PIUs. For how to connect the load interfaces to the PIUs, see Overview of Devices in the OptiX PTN 960 Installation Guide. The pins marked with + and - are connected to the 48V+ and 48Vpoles of the cable connector respectively. Table 6-6 lists the relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and fuses.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

Table 6-5 Pins of the RS232/RS485 communication interface used as a monitoring signal input/ output interface Front View Pin 1
87654321

Description Transmit positive in RS485 communication mode Transmit negative in RS485 communication mode Receive positive in RS485 communication mode Receive negative in RS485 communication mode Grounding end Grounding end

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Note 1: The power supply system and the ATN device can communicate in two modes: RS232 and RS485. The specific communication mode is determined by the DIP switch on the monitoring module. For details on the DIP switch, seeDIP Switch. Only in RS485 communication mode, the device can monitor the AC power input status of the power supply system. Note 2: The RS485 communication mode applies only when the power supply system and the PTN device use the primary/secondary node communication protocol to communicate with each other.

Output branch fuses


There are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF. The fuses disable/ enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the load and storage batteries. Table 6-6 Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and fuses Output Branch Fuse FU-1 (10 A) FU-2 (20 A) FU-BT (20 A) Load Branch LOAD1 (10 A) LOAD2 (20 A) BATT (20 A)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

DIP Switch
There is a DIP switch on the monitoring module of the EPS30-4815AF. Figure 6-5 shows the default setting and location of the DIP switch. Figure 6-5 Default setting and location of the DIP switch

CAUTION
Do not change the default setting of the DIP switch. Otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF is affected. The DIP switch indicates eight bits in binary format (on: 1; off: 0). The default value of the eight bits is 00000100. The functions of the eight bits are as follows: l l l The first five bits indicate the local and remote power addresses. Bit 5 is the highest bit and bit 1 is the lowest bit. Bit 6 sets the baud rate of communication between the monitoring module and equipment. When bit 6 is 1, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s; when bit 6 is 0, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s. Bits 7 and 8 are reserved.

6.3 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF cover the input/output voltage, current, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-7 lists the technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF. Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF Item AC input Rated input voltage Maximum input current Frequency Battery input
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Specification 220/110 (90 to 280) V AC 10 A 50/60 Hz 48 V


122

Rated input voltage

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System

Item Capacity Number of batteries DC output Rated output voltage Output current

Specification 40 Ah 4 -53.5 V DC LOAD1: 10 A (determined by the fuse) LOAD 2: 20 A (determined by the fuse)

Dimensions of the EPS30-4815AF (mounting ears included) Weight of the EPS30-4815AF Dimensions of a battery

43.6 mm (H) x 482.6 mm (W) x 270 mm (D) < 10 kg 170 mm (H) x 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

7
About This Chapter

Fibers and Cables

This chapter describes various fibers and cables used on the equipment, including fibers, power cables, grounding cables, service cables, management cables, clock cables, and alarm cables. 7.1 Fibers This section describes the types of fibers and fiber connectors. 7.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable The OptiX PTN 960 uses 2 U DC connectors to receive external power. 7.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through AC power cables. The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN 960 and batteries through DC power cables. 7.4 PGND Cables PGND cables are used to ground the OptiX PTN 960. 7.5 Service Cables The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables, and telephone wires. 7.6 Management Cables On the OptiX PTN 960, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals. 7.7 Clock Cables The clock cables used on the OptiX PTN 960 include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm clock cables. 7.8 Alarm Input/Output Cables On the OptiX PTN 960, the RJ45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms. 7.9 AC Power Monitoring and Alarm-reporting Cable

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

The AC power monitoring and alarm-reporting cable is used to connect the alarm monitoring interface on the external AC power supply module EPS30-4815AFor extended chassis and the AC power monitoring interface on the SCC board.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

7.1 Fibers
This section describes the types of fibers and fiber connectors.

7.1.1 Fiber Types


Single-mode fibers or multi-mode fibers can be used on the OptiX PTN 960. Table 7-1 lists the types of fibers used on the OptiX PTN 960. Table 7-1 Types of Fiber Connector Connector 1 Connector 2 Outer diameter 2 mm 0.9 mm SC/PC FC/PC LC/APC LC/APC N/A LC/UPC LC/APC SC/UPC LC/UPC SC/APC 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 1.6mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 1.6mm N/A SC/PC SC/PC 2 mm 3 mm Fiber Mode of transmission Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Multi-mode Type G.652D A1B G.652D G.652D A1B G.652D G.657A2 G.657A2 G.657A2 G.652D G.657B3 G.657A2 G.652D G.657A2 G.657A2 G.652D G.657B3 G.657A2 G.652D A1B
126

LC/PC LC/PC

FC/UPC

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connector Connector 1 Connector 2 FC/PC N/A SC/PC SC/APC Outer diameter 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 2 mm 0.9 mm 2 mm 0.9 mm 2 mm 0.9 mm 2 mm 2 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm

Fiber Mode of transmission Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode Type G.652D G.652D G.652D G.652D G.657A2 G.657A2 G.657A2 G.652D G.657A2 G.657A2 G.657A2 G.652D A1B G.652D G.652D A1B G.652D

SC/APC

N/A LC/UPC SC/UPC SC/UPC N/A

LC/PC FC/PC SC/PC N/A

FC/PC

All the optical interfaces on PTN equipment are LC interfaces. Select the fiber connector and the fiber length according to the on-site survey.

7.1.2 Common Fiber Connectors


The common fiber connectors of the LC/PC, FC/PC, and SC/PC types are applicable to the OptiX PTN 960. Table 7-2 lists the types and usage of the common fiber connectors applicable to the equipment. Table 7-2 Usage and types of fiber connectors Type LC/PC Description Plug-in square fiber connector/ protruding polished Usage Used at the optical interfaces on all the boards on the OptiX PTN equipment
127

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Type FC/PC SC/PC

Description Round fiber connector/protruding polished Square fiber connector/protruding polished

Usage Used at the client-side ODF or the optical interfaces on other equipment

LC/PC Fiber Connector


Figure 7-1 shows the appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector. Figure 7-1 LC/PC fiber connector

Only axial operations instead of rotation is required to insert or remove the LC/PC fiber connector. To insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector, do as follows: l l To insert the fiber jumper into the LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and then push the fiber jumper with proper force into the connector. To remove the LC/PC fiber jumper, press the clip first, push the fiber connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.

FC/PC Fiber Connector


Figure 7-2 shows the appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector. Figure 7-2 FC/PC fiber connector

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

To insert or remove an FC/PC fiber connector, do as follows: l To insert the fiber jumper into the FC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface carefully, to avoid any damage to the internal ceramic pipe. After inserting the fiber jumper to the bottom of the optical interface, clockwise rotate the external screw to tighten the fiber jumper into the optical interface. To remove the fiber jumper, first anticlockwise rotate the external screw of the optical interface. When the screw is loosened, remove the fiber jumper with proper force from the optical interface.

SC/PC Fiber Connector


Figure 7-3 shows the appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector. Figure 7-3 SC/PC fiber connector

To insert or remove an SC/PC fiber connector, do as follows. l l To insert the fiber jumper into the SC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and then push the fiber jumper with proper force into the connector. To remove the fiber jumper, press the clip first, push the fiber connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.

7.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable


The OptiX PTN 960 uses 2 U DC connectors to receive external power. Power cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of 2U DC connectors, single cord end terminals, and wires. Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of a power cable. The technical specifications of the power cable are listed in Table 7-3.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Figure 7-4 Appearance of the power cable


screwdriver -48V cable (blue)

0V cable (black)

2U DC connector

Table 7-3 Technical specifications of the power cable Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal, 4 mm2, 20 A, Insertion Depth 10 mm, Grey

4 mm2 power Power Cable, 450/750 V, H07Zcable and K UL3386, 4 mm2, Blue/Black, terminal Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable

NOTE

In the case of the OptiX PTN 960 equipment, there are following limitations on mapping relations between the cable length and the cross-sectional area. If the cross-sectional area is 4 mm2, the maximum cable length is 10 m.

7.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF


The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through AC power cables. The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN 960 and batteries through DC power cables.

Structure
Figure 7-5 shows an AC input power cable connecting the mains to the EPS30-4815AF.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Figure 7-5 AC input power cable connecting the mains to the EPS30-4815AF

Figure 7-6 shows a power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the output terminal of a storage battery. Figure 7-6 Power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the output terminal of a storage battery
Main label View A
W1 (Blue)
1 2 3 4

X2
W2 (Blue) W3 (Black) W4 (Black)

X1

X3

Figure 7-7 shows a short-circuiting cable for storage batteries. Figure 7-7 Short-circuiting cable for storage batteries
Main label

X1

W1

X2

Figure 7-8 shows a power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the PIU.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Figure 7-8 Power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the PIU


Main label
View A
W1 (Blue)
1 2 3 4

X2

W2 (Blue) W3 (Black) W4 (Black)

X1

X3

Technical Specifications
Cable Power cable for inputting the mains Item Cable type Technical specifications of the cable Fireproof class Output power cable connecting to the terminal of a storage battery Cable type Technical specifications of the X1 connector Technical specifications of the W1/W2 wire Technical specifications of the W3/W4 wire Technical specifications of the X2/X3 terminal Fireproof class Short-circuiting cable for a storage battery Cable type Technical specifications of the X1/X2 terminal Description (PI Straight Male)-(227IEC53-1.0^2(3C))(C13 Straight Female) International AC 250 V 10 A-3.00 m-3 x 1.0 mm2-Black CM (H4(5.08))-(2 x 18UL3385 Blue + 2 x 18UL3385 Black)-(2 x OT2.5-6) Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm

Electronic and Power Cable, 300 V, UL3385, 0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Blue, 15 A, Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable Electronic and Power Cable, 300 V, UL3385, 0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Black, 15 A, Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M6, Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 16 to 14AWG, Blue CM (OT2.5-5)-(14UL1015 Black)-(OT2.5-5) Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M5, Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 16 to 14AWG, Blue

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Cable

Item Technical specifications of the W1 wire Fireproof class

Description Wire, 600 V, 14AWG, Black, UL1015

CM (H4(5.08))-(2 x 18UL1015 Blue + 2 x 18UL1015 Black)-(2 x Cord End 2.0^2 Yellow (2 x 1.0)) Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm

Output power cable connecting to the PIU

Cable type

Technical specifications of the X1 connector Technical specifications of the W1/W2 wire Technical specifications of the W3/W4 wire Technical specifications of the X2/X3 terminal Fireproof class

Wire, 600 V, 18AWG, Blue, UL1015

Wire, 600 V, 18AWG, Black, UL1015

Naked Crimping Terminal, Twin Cord End Terminal, 2 mm2, Insertion Depth 8 mm, 23 A,Tin Plating, Yellow, 2 x 1.0 mm2 CM

Note 1: A power cable is named in the format of "Connector 1 Type-Cable Material TypeConnector 2 Type". Note 2: The specifications of power cables for inputting the mains vary in different countries or regions. In this document, the AC power cables complying with international standards are considered as examples.

7.4 PGND Cables


PGND cables are used to ground the OptiX PTN 960. PGND cables are made of wires and OT terminals. Figure 7-9 shows the appearance of a PGND cable. The technical specifications of the PGND cable are listed in Table 7-4. Figure 7-9 Appearance of the PGND cable

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Table 7-4 Technical specifications of the PGND cable Wire Related Parameter Power Cable, 450 V/750 V, H07Z-K UL3386, 4 mm2,Yellow Green, Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable Terminal Related Parameter Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M8, Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M4, Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow

7.5 Service Cables


The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables, and telephone wires.

7.5.1 Ethernet Cables


On the OptiX PTN 960, Ethernet cables are used to input and output Ethernet service signals. Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence of the copper cores in the cables. The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment are adaptive to the straight-through cables and crossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type of the network cables to the Ethernet service interfaces as required. Ethernet cables need to be made on site.

Structure
Figure 7-10 shows the appearance of the network cable. Figure 7-10 Appearance of the network cable

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of a network cable. Figure 7-11 shows an RJ45 connector and Figure 7-12 shows the structure of the network cable. Figure 7-11 RJ45 connector
PIN#8 PIN#1

Figure 7-12 Structure of the network cable


RJ-45 network interface connector

Label 1

Main Ethernet cable Label 2 label 8 1

8 1 X1

X2

NOTE

For a crossover cable, pins 1 and 2 of the RJ45 connector at one end must be cross-connected to pins 3 and 6 of the RJ45 connector at the other end respectively.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the pin assignment of the network cable connector. Table 7-5 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector Connector X1 Pin X1.1 X1.2 X1.3
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Connector X2 Pin X2.1 X2.2 X2.3

Color White-orange Orange White-green

Relation Twisted pair

Twisted pair
135

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connector X1 Pin X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8

Connector X2 Pin X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8

Color Green Blue White-blue White-brown Brown

Relation

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Table 7-6 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector FE Crossover Cable Conne ctor X1 Pin X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connec tor X2 Pin X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color Relatio n Twisted pair GE Crossover Cable Connec tor X1 Pin X1.1 X1.2 Twisted pair X1.3 X1.6 Twisted pair X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Conne ctor X2 Pin X2.3 X2.6 X2.1 X2.2 X2.7 X2.8 X2.4 X2.5 Color Relatio n Twisted pair

Whiteorange Orange Whitegreen Green Blue Whiteblue Whitebrown Brown

Whiteorange Orange Whitegreen Green Blue White-blue Whitebrown Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Technical Specifications
Table 7-7 lists the technical specifications of the network cable. For the technical specifications of connector X1/X2, see Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-10. Table 7-7 Technical specifications of the network cable Item Connector X1/X2 Specification Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Item Cable type Number of cores

Specification Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, PANTONE 430U Eight

7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables


On the OptiX PTN 960, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 75-ohm E1 signals. At one end of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 75-ohm E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the digital distribution frame (DDF). Make the connector as required on site.

Structure
Figure 7-13 shows the appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 7-14 shows the structure of the cable. Figure 7-13 Appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Figure 7-14 Structure of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable

Main label 1 W

X1

A View A Pos.96 Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Female Connector

Pos .1

Pin Assignment
Table 7-8 lists the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector. Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable connector Connecto r Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cable Core Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 11 R5 9 R4 7 R3 5 R2 3 R1 Serial No. 1 R0 Remarks Connecto r Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Cable Core Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 12 T5 10 T4 8 T3 6 T2 4 T1 Serial No. 2 T0 Remarks

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connecto r Pin 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Shell

Cable Core Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring External braid shield layer 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 Serial No. 13

Remarks

Connecto r Pin 37 38

Cable Core Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 Serial No. 14

Remarks

R6

T6

R7

39 40

T7

R8

41 42

T8

R9

43 44

T9

R10

45 46

T10

R11

47 48

T11

R12

73 74

T12

R13

75 76

T13

R14

77 78

T14

R15

79 80

T15

Technical Specifications
Table 7-9 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable Item Cable Specification Trunk Cable, 75ohm, 16E1, 1.6mm,Anea 96FI,SYFVZP75-1.1/0.26*32(S), +45deg

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Item Connector Cable type Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor Number of cores Available length

Specification Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And Shielding Case, IDC Type, For 28-30 AWG Solid Wire, 1 A Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-MC 75-1-1*32, 75 ohm, 12.40 mm, 1.1 mm, 0.26 mm, Pantone Warm Gray 1U, Only for OEM 12.4 mm - 1.6 mm - 0.26 mm

32 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m

7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables


On the OptiX PTN 960, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 120-ohm E1 signals. At one end of the a 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 120ohm E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the DDF. Make the connector as required on site.

Structure
Figure 7-15 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 7-16 shows the structure of the cable. Figure 7-15 Appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Figure 7-16 Structure of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable

Main label 1 W

X1

A View A Pos.96 Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Female Connector

Pos .1

Pin assignment
Table 7-10 lists the pin assignment of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector. Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable connector Connec tor Pin Cable Core White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orange Red Brown Black Blue Relatio nship Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Tape Color Blue Remar ks Connec tor Pin Cable Core White Orange White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Black Orange Relatio nship Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Tape Color Blue Remar ks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

R0

25 26

T0

R1

27 28

T1

R2

29 30

T2

R3

31 32

T3

R4

33 34

T4

R5

35 36

T5

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connec tor Pin

Cable Core Black Green Black Grey White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orange Red Brown Black Blue Black Green Black Grey Relatio nship Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Orange Tape Color

Remar ks

Connec tor Pin

Cable Core Black Brown Yellow Blue White Orange White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Black Orange Black Brown Yellow Blue Relatio nship Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Orange Tape Color

Remar ks

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Shell

R6

37 38

T6

R7

39 40

T7

R8

41 42

T8

R9

43 44

T9

R10

45 46

T10

R11

47 48

T11

R12

73 74

T12

R13

75 76

T13

R14

77 78

T14

R15

79 80

T15

External braid shield layer

Technical Specifications
Table 7-11 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable Item Cable Specification Trunk Cable, 120 ohm, 16E1, 0.4 mm, Anea 96F, 120CC32P0.4P430U(S), +45deg

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Item Connector Cable type Core diameter of the inner conductor Number of cores Available length

Specification Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And Shielding Case, IDC Type, For 24-26 AWG Solid Wire - 1 A Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 32Pairs, Pantone 430U 0.4 mm 32 twisted pairs 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m

7.6 Management Cables


On the OptiX PTN 960, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals. The management cables for the OptiX PTN 960 include Ethernet cables. l Ethernet cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables, and are used for communication between the equipment and the NMS computer. Both the NM interface on the equipment is adaptive to a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.

Ethernet Cables
Figure 7-17 shows an RJ45 connector used at the end of the Ethernet cable. When the cable is connected to the ETH/OAM interface, the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector is as listed in Table 7-12. Table 7-13 lists the technical specifications of the Ethernet cable. Figure 7-17 RJ45 connector
PIN#8 PIN#1

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (ETH/OAM) Connecto r Pin 1
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Color White-orange

Relation Twisted pair

Usage Transmit positive of the NM interface


143

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connecto r Pin 2 3 6 4 5 7 8

Color Orange White-green Green Blue White-blue White-brown Brown

Relation

Usage Transmit negative of the NM interface

Twisted pair

Receive positive of the NM interface Receive negative of the NM interface

Twisted pair

Grounding end of the NM serial interface Receive end of the NM serial interface

Twisted pair

Unspecified Transmit end of the NM serial interface

Table 7-13 Technical specifications of the Ethernet cable Item Connector Cable type Number of cores Specification Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, PANTONE 430U Eight

7.7 Clock Cables


The clock cables used on the OptiX PTN 960 include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm clock cables.

7.7.1 External Clock Cables


On the OptiX PTN 960, the external clock cables with RJ45 connectors are used to input and output the external clock or time signals. The external clock cables can be connected to the CLK and TOD interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960. The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site.

Structure
Figure 7-18 shows the structure of the RJ45 connector used on the external clock cable.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Figure 7-18 Structure of the RJ45 Connector


PIN#8 PIN#1

Pin Assignment
The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site. The pin assignment of the CLK interface is as listed in Table 7-14; the pin assignment of the TOD interface is as listed in Table 7-15. Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (input and output, external clock mode) Connector Pin 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 Color White-orange Orange White-green Green Blue White-blue White- brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Relationship Twisted pair Description Receive negative of CLK Receive positive of CLK Unspecified Unspecified Transmit negative of CLK Transmit positive of CLK Unspecified Unspecified

Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external time mode) Connecto r Pin Color Relationshi p Description 1PPS + Time Information Mode Unspecified Unspecified Twisted pair Negative of 1PPS signals DCLS Mode Unspecified Unspecified Negative of DCLS signals

1 2 3

White-orange Orange White-green

Twisted pair

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connecto r Pin

Color

Relationshi p

Description 1PPS + Time Information Mode Positive of 1PPS signals DCLS Mode Positive of DCLS signals Grounding terminal Grounding terminal Unspecified Unspecified

6 4 5 7 8

Green Blue White-blue White-brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair

Grounding terminal Grounding terminal Negative of time information Positive of time information

Technical Specifications
Table 7-16 lists the technical specifications of the external clock cable. Table 7-16 Technical specifications of the external clock cable Item Connector Cable type Number of cores Specification Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e, 0.52 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, 4 Pairs, PANTONE 430U Eight

7.7.2 Clock Bridging Cable


On the OptiX PTN 960, the 120-to-75-ohm clock cable is used as the clock bridging cable.

Structure
Figure 7-19 shows the structure of the 120-to-75-ohm clock bridging cable. Figure 7-19 Structure of the clock bridging cable
120-ohm or 75ohm conversion connector
W1

Heat-shrink tube
View A

Label

RJ-45 connector
A

Main label

Heat-shrink tube
W5

8 1

Heat-shrink tube

W2 W3

X1
W4

30 m

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Pin Assignment
Table 7-17 lists the pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector. Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector 120-Ohm Cable Connector Pin X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 Color Orange White Blue White Green White White Brown Twisted pair W4 Twisted pair W3 Twisted pair W2 Relation Twisted pair 75-Ohm Cable Core No. W1

Technical Specifications
Table 7-18 lists the technical specifications of the clock bridging cable. Table 7-18 Technical specifications of the clock bridging cable Item Cable Connector X1 type 120-ohm cable type 75-ohm cable type Cable length Specification Single Cable, 120 ohm To 75 ohm Clock Cable, 30 m, MP8-II, 120CC4P0.4P430U(S)+4*SYV75-2/0.34(S) Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 4Pairs, Pantone 430U Coaxial Cable, SYV-75-2-2(4.0Z)-1/0.34 mm, OD3.9 mm, Double-Layer Copper Braid Shielded 30 m

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

7.8 Alarm Input/Output Cables


On the OptiX PTN 960, the RJ45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms. At one end of the alarm input/output cable, the RJ45 connector is used to connect to the ALMI/ O interface on the equipment; at the other end, a connector (made as required on site) is used to connect to the external equipment or the equipment that monitors all the alarms.

Structure
Figure 7-20 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable. Figure 7-20 Structure of the alarm input/output cable

RJ-45 Connector

Main label W

8 1 X1

Pin Assignment
lists the pin assignment of the alarm input/output alarm cable connector. Table 7-19 Pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable connector Connector Pin 1 2 3 6 4 5
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Color White-orange Orange White-green Green Blue White-blue

Relation Twisted pair

Description Alarm input 1 Ground for alarm input 1

Twisted pair

Alarm input 2 Ground for alarm input 2

Twisted pair

Alarm input 3 Ground for alarm input 3


148

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Connector Pin 7 8

Color White- brown Brown

Relation Twisted pair

Description Positive for critical or major alarm signal output Negative for critical or major alarm signal output

Technical Specifications
Table 7-20 lists the technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable. Table 7-20 Technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable Item Connector X1 Cable type Specification Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, PANTONE 430U

7.9 AC Power Monitoring and Alarm-reporting Cable


The AC power monitoring and alarm-reporting cable is used to connect the alarm monitoring interface on the external AC power supply module EPS30-4815AFor extended chassis and the AC power monitoring interface on the SCC board.

Structure
Figure 7-21 shows the structure of the AC power monitoring and alarm-reporting cable. Figure 7-21 Structure of the monitoring and alarm-reporting cable
Label 1 Main Label Label 2

View A 8 1

View B

8 1

X1
X1: connecting the alarm interface on the EPS30-4815AF/extended chassis Label 1: RS232/RS485

Wire

X2
X2: connecting the alarm interface on the system control board Label 2: TODX

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

7 Fibers and Cables

Pin Assignment
Table 7-21 lists the pin assignment of the monitoring and alarm-reporting cable. Table 7-21 Pin assignment of the monitoring and alarm-reporting cable Cable W Connector Pin X1.2 X1.1 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 X2.7 X2.8 X2.6 X2.3 X2.5 X2.4 Color White/Orange Orange White/Blue Blue White/Brown Brown Twisted-pair Twisted-pair Relationship Twisted-pair

Note: The excessive wires should be cut.

Technical Specifications
Item Monitoring and alarm-reporting cable Connectors X1 and X2 Cable material Technical Specifications Monitor & Alarm Cable, Straight Through Cable, 0.75 m, MP8-I, CC4P0.5GY, MP8-I Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug Twisted-Pair Cable, 100-ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8Cores, PANTONE 430U

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

A Safety Labels

A
Label Description
There are labels on the chassis and boards. See Table A-1. Table A-1 Label description Figure Type ESD protection label

Safety Labels

The equipment has various safety labels. This section describes the suggestions and locations of these safety labels.

Description The label suggests the electrostaticsensitive equipment.

Chassis grounding label

The label indicates the position of the grounding terminal. When the equipment is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, it is recommended that you use the grounding terminal specified in this label. The label indicates the position of the general grounding terminal. When the equipment is installed in a cabinet rather than a 19-inch cabinet, it is recommended that you use the grounding terminal specified in this label. The label suggests that do not touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating. The label indicates the precaution that should be taken for operations on the PIU board. For details, see Label

Chassis grounding label

Fan warning label

Operation warning label


!

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

A Safety Labels

Figure
/QUALIFICATION CARD

Type Qualification label

Description The equipment is qualified.

HUAWEI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

Product nameplate label


OptiX PTN 960
POWER RATING: -48-60V;8A 1 Class 1 Laser Product

The label suggests the product name and certification.

N14036

A VCCI-A

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

OptiX PTN 960


POWER RATING: ~ 100 -240 V; 50/60 HZ; 4 A

Product nameplate label for an extended chassis

The label suggests the product name and certification.

N14036

1 Class 1 Laser Product

A VCCI-A

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

Label Position
Figure A-1 shows positions of labels on the chassis.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

A Safety Labels

Figure A-1 Label position


OptiX PTN 960
POWER RATING: -48-60V;8A

N14036

1 Class 1 Laser Product

/QUALIFICATION CARD

A VCCI -A

HUAWEI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

H U A W E I TE C H N O LG I E S C O . , LTD .

MADE IN CHINA

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

B
Index of Indicators
For boards and their indicators, see Boards and Their Indicators. For board status indicators, see: l l l l l l l l Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT) Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG) Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC) Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)

Indicators

This topic describes the names of various indicators and their indications.

Description of the CXPA/CXPB Switching Status Indicator (ACTX) Description of the CXPA/CXPB Control Status Indicator (ACTC) Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWR) Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)

For service port status indicators, see: l l l l Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT) Description of the Port Status Indicators of the Ethernet Electrical Ports (LINK) Description of the Port Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicators of the Ethernet Optical Ports (L/A) Description of the AQ1/SQ1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4), CQ1B Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4)

For system alarm indicators, see: l l l Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT) Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ) Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)

For combination of indicators in different start statuses on the system control board, see Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board.
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

Boards and Their Indicators


Board CXPA CXPB EX1 CQ1B AQ1 SQ1 EM4F EM4T EM8F EM8T PIU FAN Indicator STAT, PROG, SYNC, ACTX, ACTC STAT, PROG, SYNC, ACTX, ACTC STAT, SRV, L/A STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, LOS4 STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, LOS4 STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, LOS4 STAT, SRV, L/A1 to L/A4 STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT STAT, SRV, L/A1 to L/A8 STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT PWR CRIT, MAJ, MIN, FAN

Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)


Status On (green) On (red) Blinking (red) On (orange) Off Indication The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board needs to be removed. The interface board is not loaded with the logic. l No power is input. l The board is not running.

Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)


Status On (green) Indication l The board software is being initialized. l The board software is normally initialized, and the board software is running normally.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

Status On (red)

Indication l The memory self-check fails. l The board software or the logic file is lost. l Loading of the board software fails.

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms alternately (green) On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms alternately (green) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms alternately (red) Off

Loading of the board software is in progress. The BIOS is guiding the upper-layer software. The BIOS self-check fails. No power is input.

Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)


Status On (green) Indication l The clock works in free-run mode and the system clock priority list is not set. By default, the system clock priority list contains only internal sources. l The clock works in locked mode and is tracing a clock source other than the internal sources in the priority list. l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode, and the PTP time and system clock are in the tracing state. On (red) l The system clock priority list is set. All the clock sources, however, are lost except for the internal clock sources. The clock works in holdover mode or free-run mode. l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode, but no synchronization source is available. The system clock and PTP time are working in holdover or free-run mode.

Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)


Status On (green) Indication Services are running normally and no service-related alarm occurs (including the situation where the board is activated but not configured with services). A critical or major service-related alarm occurs. A minor or remote service-related alarm occurs.

On (red) On (orange)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

Status Off

Indication l No power is input. l The board is not running.

Status On (green) On (red) On (orange) Off

Indication No service-affecting alarm is generated. A critical or major service-affecting alarm is generated. A minor service-affecting alarm is generated. l No power is input. l The board is not running.

Description of the CXPA/CXPB Switching Status Indicator (ACTX)


Status On (green) Off Indication The board is in the working switching state. The board is in the protection switching state.

Description of the CXPA/CXPB Control Status Indicator (ACTC)


Status On (green) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms alternately (green) Off Indication The board is in the working control state. The data in the database of the equipment is backed up in batch. The board is in the protection control state.

Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWR)


Status On (green) Off Indication Power is accessed. l No power is accessed. l The power supply poles are inversely connected.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)


Status On (green) On (red) Off Indication The fans are working normally. The fans are working abnormally. The fans are not powered.

Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)


Status Blinking (orange) Off Indication The data interface is transmitting or receiving data. The data interface is not transmitting or receiving data.

Description of the Port Status Indicators of the Ethernet Electrical Ports (LINK)
Status On (green) Off Indication The physical port connection is normal. The physical port connection fails.

Description of the Port Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicators of the Ethernet Optical Ports (L/A)
Status On (green) Blinking (orange) Indication The connection on the physical port is normal. The connection on the physical port is normal, and data is received or transmitted on the port. The physical connection fails.

Off

Description of the AQ1/SQ1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4), CQ1B Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4)
Status On (green)
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Indication The signal on the port is normal.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

Status On (red) Off

Indication The signal on the port is lost. The optical module is offline.

Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)


Status On (red) Off Indication Critical alarms are generated in the equipment. No critical alarms are generated in the equipment.

Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)


Status On (orange) Off Indication Major alarms are generated in the equipment. No major alarms are generated in the equipment.

Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)


Status On (yellow) Off Indication Minor alarms are generated in the equipment. No minor alarms are generated in the equipment.

Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board
From power on to normal running, the system control board goes through various status. Table B-1 shows the indicator combination corresponding to these statuses. Table B-1 Start status indicator combination SN Status Indicator STAT PROG ACTC ACTX 1 The system control board is not powered on. Off Off Off Off SRV

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

B Indicators

SN

Status

Indicator STAT PROG ACTC ACTX SRV

2 3

The BIOS is being started. The BIOS is started, and guides and loads the board software. The upper-layer software is being initialized. The upper-layer software initialization is complete, but the system control board is not running. The system control board is running.

Off Off

Green Blinking (green) Green

Off Off

Off Off

Off

Off

Off

Green

Green

Off

Off

Green

Green

Off/Green/ Blinking (green)a

Always onb

NOTE a: When the system control board is running, the ACTC and ACTX indicators may be off, in green or blinking (green). When services are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, see Description of the CXPA/CXPB Switching Status Indicator (ACTX) and Description of the CXPA/ CXPB Control Status Indicator (ACTC). b: When the system control board is running, the SRV indicator may be in red, orange, or green. When services are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, see Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV).

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

C Mounting Ears

C
Table C-1 Mapping between cabinets and mounting ears Appearance Mounting Ears Mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (2 U chassis) Mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (extended chassis) 129.7 255.5 Height (mm) 86.1 Depth (mm) 39.0

Mounting Ears

This topic provides the types and specifications of mounting ears that are commonly used to install the OptiX PTN 960 in different cabinets. Table C-1 lists the mounting ears that are commonly used to install the OptiX PTN 960 in a cabinet.

Width (mm) 20.3

Specifications For details, see Figure C-1 and Figure C-2. For details, see Figure C-3 and Figure C-4.

20.3

Mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet (2 U chassis) When the OptiX PTN 960 is installed in the ETSI cabinet, both mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet and those for the 19inch cabinet need to be used.

88.0

25.5

44.0

For details, see Figure C-5.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

C Mounting Ears

Figure C-1 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (2 U chassis, left)
16.0 16.55 6.4 10.3 F-M4-1
86.1 46.1 76.2 59.5

4- 4.5 Countersink

8.5 X 90

49.4

17.0 11.6 39.0 20.3

Figure C-2 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (2 U chassis, right)
16.0 16.55 20.3 11.6 R3.4

86.1

46.1

59.5

76.2

5.0

10.3 6.4 4- 4.5 Countersink 8.5 X 90 2-R3.4


2.0

17.0 39.0

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2.0

R3.4

5.0

162

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

C Mounting Ears

Figure C-3 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (extended chassis, left)
255.5 240.5 12 - 4.5 Countersink 8.5X90 123.6 16.0 16.1 4-10.3

67.7 33.9

59.5

4-6.8

28.6

53.0

56.9

30.0

105.5

8.8

244.7

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20.3

4.1

3.5 Countersink

20.8

5.8

22.5 7.5X90

16.9

31.8

F 8.2

110.9

F-M4-1

129.7

57.1

163

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

C Mounting Ears

Figure C-4 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (extended chassis, right)
255.5 240.5 123.6 32.1
20.0

4-10.2
R2 2.0

4-6.8

124.5 countersink 8.5X90


59.5

16.1

67.7

33.9

56.9

53.0

30.0

3.5 countersink 7.5X90

16.9

22.5 105.5

20.8

5.8

18.6

8.8

244.7

15

46

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

20.3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4.1

31.8

F 8.2

110.8

129.7

57.1

2-M4

164

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

C Mounting Ears

Figure C-5 Specifications of mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet (2 U chassis)
76.2 10.0 6.4 2-S-M6-1-ZC (on the back)

35.0

2 6.8
10.0

44.0

2 10.3

50.0 88.0

2.0

For details on how to install mounting ears and subracks, see the OptiX PTN 960 Quick Installation Guide.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21.5 25.5

23.0

21.0

165

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

D Board Dimensions

D
This section describes board dimensions. Type System control board Board l TND3CXPA l TND3CXPB Interface board l TND1EX1 l TND1EM8F l TND1EM8T l TND1EM4F l TND1EM4T l TND2AQ1 l TND1SQ1 l TND1CQ1B l TND3ML1A l TND3ML1B l TND2MD1A l TND2MD1B Single-slot PIU FAN TND1PIU TND1FAN

Board Dimensions

Board Dimensions 22.86 mm (H) x 225.75 mm (D) x 193.80 mm (W) 20.32 mm (H) x 225.75 mm (D) x 193.80 mm (W)

41.4 mm (H) x 229.9 mm (D) x 21.0 mm (W) 86.2 mm (H) x 217.6 mm (D) x 28.5 mm (W)

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

E Power Consumption and Weight

E
Board CXPA CXPB TND1EX1 TND1CQ1B TND2AQ1 TND1SQ1 TND1EM4F TND1EM4T TND1EM8F TND1EM8T TND3ML1A/ TND3ML1B TND2MD1A/ TND2MD1B PIU FAN

Power Consumption and Weight

This chapter lists the power consumption and weight of each board used for the OptiX PTN 960. Table E-1 lists the power consumption and weight of boards. Table E-1 Power consumption and weight Weight (kg) 0.68 0.68 0.48 0.53 0.58 0.47 0.49 0.44 0.56 0.46 0.62 0.62 0.12 0.30 Power Consumption (W) 27.3 27.3 13.1 10.5 23.00 11.50 12.0 10.4 18.9 21.1 9.5 12.1 0.5 l Low rate: 4.1 l Medium rate: 13.6 l High rate: 29.6
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

F Board Configuration Parameters

F
l

Board Configuration Parameters

You can use the U2000 to configure each parameter of the interface boards, cross-connect and system control board.

Parameters of the Interface Board


The configurable parameters of the interface boards are the Ethernet interface, PDH interface, SDH interface, path configuration, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and spare timeslot recovery value. The attributes of an Ethernet interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. To configure an Ethernet interface, configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters, network layer parameters and flow control schemes. The attributes of a PDH interface cover the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. To configure an E1 interface, configure the physical parameters, network layer parameters, signal frame format, clock mode and loopback scheme. The attributes of an SDH interface cover the general attributes and advanced attributes. To configure an SDH interface, configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters and network layer parameters. The attributes of the path configuration cover the VC12 frame format and frame mode of a channelized SDH interface. The J0 byte is continually transmitted to carry section access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end. It is recommended to set the J0 byte to "0". The J1 byte is the path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the higher order access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end. When detecting mismatch of the J1 bytes, the receive end inserts the HP_TIM alarm in the corresponding path. The J2 byte is a VC-12 path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the lower order access point identifiers based on the negotiation of the two ends. According to these access point identifiers, the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end in this path. The C2 byte is the signal label byte, which indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frames and the payload property. The received C2 should be consistent with the transmitted
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

l l

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

F Board Configuration Parameters

C2. If the C2 bytes are mismatched, the local end inserts the HP_SLM alarm in the corresponding VC-4 path. Table F-1 lists the mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2. Table F-1 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte Input Service Type TUG structure Unequipped C2 Byte (in Hex) 02 00

l l

To configure the ALS is to set the parameters of the optical interface. To ensure the valid utilization of the path, the spare timeslots are eliminated when the signals are encapsulated into the network. In this way, the TDM frame is partially stuffed. To recover the TDM frame at the service sink, the spare timeslots eliminated during encapsulation are added again.

Parameters of the Cross-Connect and System Control Board


The configurable parameters of the cross-connect and system control board board are the environment monitor interface, the external time interface and the phase-locked source output by external clock. You can set the relay control mode and enable or disable the major alarm relay and critical alarm relay to configure the environment monitor interface. You can set the basic Attribute, BMC, and Cable Transmitting Distance to configure the external time interface. You can set the output mode, output timeslot, output threshold, failure condition and failure action of the 2M phase-locked source external clock For details, see OptiX PTN 960 Configuration Guide and the U2000 Online Help.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

G
Numerics
1+1 hot backup 1000BASE-T 100BASE-TX

Glossary

A backup mode in which two systems with the same functions are deployed, one in the active state and the other in the standby state with power on. The standby system backs up the data of the active system automatically. Once the active system encounters a fault, the standby system takes over the service of the active system automatically or by manual intervention. Twisted cable with the transmission speed as 1000 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 m. IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire. IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 10 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire.

10BASE-TX

A
AAL ABR AC access control list ACL active link active/standby switchover address pool See ATM Adaptation Layer See available bit rate See attachment circuit A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. See access control list In the link aggregation group, the links connected to active interfaces are active links. A troubleshooting technology. When an active device becomes faulty, services and control functions are automatically switched over to the standby device to ensure the normal running of the services and functions. A set of IP addresses assigned by Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) or an organization tied to IANA.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

Address Resolution Protocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. See asymmetric digital subscriber line An advanced ACL can define ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses, protocol type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and message codes. See assured forwarding Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes. A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects. See alarm indication signal

administrative unit

Administrator ADSL advanced ACL

AF aggregated link aggregation AIS

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS) . Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading alarm cause The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem. An operation performed on an alarm. Through this operation, the status of an alarm is changed from uncleared to cleared, which indicates that the fault causing the alarm has been rectified.

alarm clearance

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

alarm inversion

For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported. On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting the conditions. Alarm name is a brief description of the symptom of the failure related to this alarm. When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by users. Alarm parameters describe the location where the fault has occurred. For example, for an alarm on a board, the parameters include the shelf ID, slot ID and port ID. The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning. The devices in the network report traps to the Network Management System (NMS), which displays the alarm statuses in the topological view. The status of an alarm can be critical, major, minor and prompt. A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. See automatic laser shutdown See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol See Autonomous System One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

alarm mask

alarm name Alarm notification

alarm parameter alarm severity

alarm status

alarm suppression

ALS APS ARP AS assured forwarding

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

asymmetric digital subscriber line

A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps. Asynchronization does not use the exact data signals timed by the clock. The signals have different frequencies and phases. The asynchronization usually encapsulates the bits into the control flag, which specifies the beginning and end of the bits. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode An interface between higher-layer protocols and the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of information, including voice, video, and data. ATM permanent virtual circuit The physical or virtual circuit attaching a CE to a PE. Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels. See administrative unit An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities. A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

asynchronization

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM ATM Adaptation Layer ATM PVC attachment circuit attenuation AU auto-negotiation automatic laser shutdown automatic protection switching Autonomous System

available bit rate

B
B-ISDN backward backward defect indication See Broadband Integrated Services Digital Networks Pertaining to signals or operations propagating in the opposite direction relative to the call set-up. When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

base station controller

A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. Basic ACL basic input/output system bayonet-neillconcelman BC BDI BE BER best effort A basic ACL can define ACL rules based on only source addresses. A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables. See boundary clock See backward defect indication See best effort See bit error rate A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability. See bidirectional forwarding detection See Border Gateway Protocol A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Two systems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the two systems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system for a long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX and RX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load. See basic input/output system See bit-interleaved parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.

BFD BGP bidirectional forwarding detection

BIOS BIP bit error bit error rate

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

bit-interleaved parity

A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See building integrated timing supply best master clock See bayonet-neill-concelman An interautonomous system routing protocol. An autonomous system is a network or group of networks under a common administration and with common routing policies. BGP is used to exchange routing information for the Internet and is the protocol used between Internet service providers (ISP). A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths. See bridge protocol data unit The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

BITS BMC BNC Border Gateway Protocol

boundary clock BPDU bridge protocol data unit

Broadband Integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice. Services Digital It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at Networks 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed. broadband TV broadcast address broadcast domain Broadband TV involves accessing multimedia content via a broadband connection and viewing it on a normal TV. In computer networking, a broadcast address is a network address that allows information to be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host. A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device within the group. Broadcasts do not pass through a router, which bound the domains. In addition, the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame. See base station controller See base transceiver station See broadband TV In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

BSC BTS BTV building integrated timing supply

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

bus

A path or channel for signal transmission. The typical case is that, the bus is an electrical connection that connects one or more conductors. All devices that are connected to a bus, can receive all transmission contents simultaneously.

C
cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order. cable tie CAR carrier sense multiple access/ collision detection CBR CBS CC CCF CCM CDR CDV CDVT CE cell delay variation tolerance cell loss priority The tape used to bind the cables. See committed access rate A network access method in which devices that are ready to transmit data first check the channel for a carrier. If no carrier is sensed, a device can transmit. If two devices transmit at once, a collision occurs and each computer backs off and waits a random amount of time before attempting to retransmit. This is the access method used by Ethernet. See constant bit rate See committed burst size See connectivity check See connection control function See continuity check message clock and data recovery cell delay variation See cell delay variation tolerance See customer edge This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not apply to end-systems. Field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be dropped. circuit emulation over packet See circuit emulation service See compact flash See connectivity fault management One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series. A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. See connection identifier See committed information rate
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

CEP CES CF CFM chain network channel

CID CIR
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

circuit emulation service

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. See common and internal spanning tree connectionless network protocol

CIST CLNP

clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds. clock tracing CLP coarse wavelength division multiplexing colored packet committed access rate The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. See cell loss priority A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

committed burst size

committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.

common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be regarded as their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP. compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency. A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When the network congestion occurs, it places the packet into the queue for buffer and determines the order of forwarding the packet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

congestion congestion management

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

connection control

The set of functions used for setting up, maintaining and releasing a communication path between two or more users or a user and a network entity, e.g. a dual tone multi-frequency receiver. A functional entity in the distributed functional plane of the intelligent network (IN) conceptual model, which provides the basic call services of the bearer (telecom) network and the advanced switch-based services with the call processing and controlling functions. The MAC layer defined in the IEEE802.16 protocol is based on connection. Each connection is uniquely identified with a CID. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) is an end-to-end per-service-instance Ethernet layer operation, administration, and management (OAM) protocol. It includes proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks (MANs) and WANs. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

connection control function

connection identifier connectivity check connectivity fault management

constant bit rate

constraint shortest path An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed using first CSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortest path algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. A constraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidth guaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of link traversed etc. CSPF is widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known as Constraint Based Routing (CBR). constraint-based routed label switched path continuity check message control plane An Label Switched Path set up based on certain constraints is called Constraint-based Routed Label Switched Path (CR-LSP). CCM is used to detect the link status. The control plane performs the call control and connection control functions. Through signaling, the control plane sets up and releases connections, and may restore a connection in case of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in support of call and connection control, such as routing information dissemination. A 4-byte encapsulated packet header. It is used to transmit packets in a MPLS packet switching network. The convergence layer is a "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. It provides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performances, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.

control word convergence layer

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

core layer

The core layer functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks, and it provides high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission structure that provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer devices must have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability, adaptability, and they support dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network, the core layer includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone routers. See customer premises equipment customer premises network See constraint-based routed label switched path See cyclic redundancy check A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa. See carrier sense multiple access/ collision detection See constraint shortest path first See common spanning tree cell transfer delay An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled. Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers, namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) is equipment located at an end-user's premises. Most CPEs are telephones or other service equipment. A CPE can be a Mobile Station (MS) or a Subscriber Station (SS). An MS is mobile equipment, and an SS is fixed equipment. connectivity verification See control word See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

CPE CPN CR-LSP CRC crossover cable CSMA/CD CSPF CST CTD current alarm current performance data

customer edge customer premises equipment

CV CW CWDM cyclic redundancy check

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

D
data communication network data communications channel A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. Data connection equipment including analog, DSL, ISDN, cable modem circuits. Layer 2 in the open system interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides services to transfer data over the transmission link between open systems. A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE equipment (for example, model) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE. A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See direct current See data communications channel See data connection equipment See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network See discard eligible See drop eligible indicator A component of cell transfer delay, which is induced by buffering. Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

data connection equipment data link layer data terminal equipment Datagram DC DCC DCE DCN DDF DDN DE DEI delay variation dense wavelength division multiplexing

desired Min Tx interval The minimum interval that the local system would like to use when transmitting BFD control packets. Detection multiplier DHCP DHCP Relay The desired detect time multiplier for BFD control packets. It determines the session detection time together with the DMTI and RMRI. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol relay (DHCP relay) is a function that enables forwarding of DHCP data between the device that requests the IP address and the DHCP server. A program that allocates the IP addresses of the local address pool to the users at the user side and allocates the IP addresses of the relay address pool to the users that pass through the DHCP proxy at the network side.

DHCP Server

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

differentiated services

A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. See differentiated services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without affecting the POTS service. A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. The cross-connection that exists on an NE but cannot form trails on the network management system. The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs. See data link layer See desired Min Tx interval See dual node interconnection See domain name service A hierarchical naming system for computers, services, or any resource connected to the Internet or a private network. It associates various information with domain names assigned to each of the participants. The Domain Name System distributes the responsibility of assigning domain names and mapping those names to IP addresses by designating authoritative name servers for each domain. dynamic random database DEI indicates the eight transmission precedence in the PRI field can be combined with drop precedence. See dynamic service

DiffServ digital data network

digital distribution frame digital subscriber line

digital subscriber line access multiplexer direct current discard eligible

Discrete service dispersion

DLL DMTI DNI DNS domain name service

DRDB drop eligible indicator DS

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

DS boundary node DS domain

A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See digital subscriber line See digital subscriber line access multiplexer See data terminal equipment A network topology in which a device is connected to the network at two independent access points. One point is the primary connection and the other a standby connection that is activated in the event of a failure of the primary connection. DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario. A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure. See dense wavelength division multiplexing

DS interior node DS node DSL DSLAM DTE dual homing

dual node interconnection dual-ended switching DWDM

Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts. dynamic service A term used in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 802.16 networks to describe a set of messages and protocols that allow a base station and subscriber station to add, modify, or delete the characteristics of s service flow.

E
E-LAN E-Tree E1 EBS ECC Edge LSR See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet-tree A European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides 32 x 64 kbit/s channels. See excess burst size See embedded control channel The basic unit of the MPLS network is LSR. The network composed by LSR is named MPLS domain. LSR is located at the edge of the MPLS domain. LSR used to connect other user network is named Label Edge Router (LER). The LSR in the core of the internal area is the core LSR. The core LSR can be the router that supports MPLS and be the ATM-LSR generated after the ATM switch is ungraded. LSRs in the domain communicated by MPLS. See expedited forwarding

EF

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

EFM EGP Egress electromagnetic compatibility

See Ethernet in the first mile See Exterior Gateway Protocol The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled. The egress LER is named Egress. Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The process of limiting the coupling of an electromagnetic field between two locations. Typically, it is applied to enclosures, separating electrical circuits from external surroundings, and to cables, separating internal wires from the surroundings that the cable passes through. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference See electromagnetic shielding A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence of erroneous inputs. A one-second interval during which at least one errored frame is detected. See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. Ethernet link trace Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

electromagnetic interference electromagnetic shielding

electrostatic discharge embedded control channel EMC EMI EMS Engineering label EPL EPLAN error tolerance errored frame second ESD ESD jack ETH-LT Ethernet in the first mile

Ethernet LAN

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet virtual private LAN Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet-tree ETS ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPLAN EVPLn excess burst size

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

See Ethernet virtual private LAN service See Ethernet virtual private LAN A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. See experimental bits The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110". A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify the CoS of the MPLS packet. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE. A protocol for exchanging routing information between two neighbor gateway hosts (each with its own router) in a network of autonomous systems. The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.

Exercise Switching EXP expedited forwarding

experimental bits Extended ID Exterior Gateway Protocol extra traffic

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

F
fair queue fast Ethernet A mechanism for queue scheduling in which network resource is allocated equally and delay and jitter time of all traffic are optimized. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). A technology to locally protect MPLS TE network. Only the interface with the speed of 100 Mbps can support FRR. If the switching speed of FRR can reach 50ms, the packet loss decreases when some faults occur on the network. FRR is applicable to services that are very sensitive to packet loss and delay. When a fault is detected at the lower layer, the lower layer informs the upper routing system of the fault. Then the routing system forwards packets through a backup link. In this manner, the impact of the link fault on services is minimized. FRR is local and temporary. Once the protected LSP recovers or a new LSP is set up, traffic is switched to the original or the new LSP. After you configure FRR on LSP and some link or some node on LSP is invalid, traffic is switched to the protected link and a new LSP is trying to be set up on the LSP ingress. See forward defect indication See fast Ethernet See forwarding equivalence class See fixed filter style fast failure detection FFD is a path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service requirements. An FFD packet contains information the same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same way for processing CV packets. See forward information base A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See first in first out queuing A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep proper airflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance.

fast reroute

FDI FE FEC FF FFD FFD packet

FIB fiber patch cord field programmable gate array

FIFO File Transfer Protocol

filler panel

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

first in first out queuing A queuing policy that features that the packet reaching earlier can be allocated resource firstly. fixed filter style flash memory On an MPLS network, an RSVP node creates a distinct reservation for data packets from a particular sender. This sender does not share its resource reservation with other senders. A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data shored in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off. A set of mechanisms used to prevent the network from being overloaded by regulating the input rate transmissions. The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow; HQoS performs queue scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other. It is the direction that traffic flows along the detected LSP. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. In data communication, a table of information that provides network hardware (bridges and routers) with the directions needed to forward packets of data to locations on other networks. The information contained in a routing table differs according to whether it is used by a bridge or a router. A bridge relies on both the source (originating) and destination addresses to determine where and how to forward a packet.

flow control flow queue

Forward forward defect indication

forward information base

forwarding equivalence As a class-based forwarding technology, MPLS classifies the packets with the same class forwarding mode, and the process is called Forwarding Equivalence Class. Packets with the same FEC are processed similarly on an MPLS network. It is flexible to divide FECs, and it can be a combination of the source address, the destination address, the source port, the destination port, the protocol type, the VPN, and so on. Forwarding plane FPGA FPS FQ FR frame relay Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. See field programmable gate array PW fast protection switching (FPS) achieves dual-homing protection for E-Line services. See fair queue See frame relay A packet-switching protocol for use on WANs (wide area networks). Frame relay transmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbps over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but dispenses with some of X.25's error detection for the sake of speed. See also ATM (definition 1), X.25.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

Free-run mode

An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference. See fast reroute See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.

FRR FTP full-duplex

G
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port. A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit Ethernet A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. Applied to the encapsulation of IP datagrams tunneled through the internet, GRE is a mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol, and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data packets. See generic framing procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute).

gateway network element GE generic framing procedure generic routing encapsulation

GFP gigabit Ethernet

Global Positioning System global system for mobile communications


Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

GND GNE GPS GR graceful restart

Ground See gateway network element See Global Positioning System See graceful restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/ MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-Intermediate System (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwarding is not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocols at the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This series of standards is called graceful restart.

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GRE GSM GUI See generic routing encapsulation See global system for mobile communications See graphical user interface

H
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. high-speed digital subscriber line It is the commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It contains DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), the known neighbors and the values of timers. A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers. The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored in the NMS. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A technology used to improve the reliability and maintainability of a system. It ensures that the system performance is not affected when a board is inserted and removed during system running.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

Hardware loopback HDSL hello packet

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

higher order path History Performance Data Hold priority

hot plugging

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

hot standby

A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. See higher order path See hot standby See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HP HSB HSDPA

I
I/O IANA ICMP IE IEC IEEE IETF IGMP IGMP snooping input/output See Internet assigned numbers authority See Internet Control Message Protocol See information element See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See Interior Gateway Protocol See Interior Gateway Routing Protocol See inverse multiplexing over ATM The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. An Information Element is a group of information which may be included within a signaling message or data flow which is sent across an interface. Examples may include QoS (Quality of Service) definitions, setup parameters, user identifiers etc. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled. The ingress LER is named Ingress. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

IGP IGRP IMA IMA frame

information element

Ingress Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

integrated services digital network

A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive transmission service. A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in smallsized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF). A routing protocol from Cisco that was developed in 1988 to overcome the shortcomings of RIP. IGRP takes bandwidth, latency, reliability and current traffic load into consideration. It is typically used within an autonomous system, such as an Internet domain. IGRP was superseded by Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP). A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R). The organization operated under the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Interior Gateway Protocol

Interior Gateway Routing Protocol

internal spanning tree International Electrotechnical Commission International Telecommunication Union Internet assigned numbers authority

Internet Control Message Protocol

Internet Engineering Task Force

Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

Internet protocol television

In the Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) system, video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP", IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the images in realtime. The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services. A way to connect telecom devices so that they can communicate with each other. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify the host itself. IP protocol refers to a protocol suite consisting of a series of standards that enables a data packet to be transmitted to its destination through the Internet. IP protocol provides a connectionless data packet transmission mechanism, shields physical network transmission, addresses IP, and selects routes. See Internet protocol television See Internet Protocol version 4 See Internet protocol version 6 See integrated services digital network See Internet service provider See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union

Internet Protocol version 4

Internet protocol version 6

Internet service provider interworking inverse multiplexing over ATM

IP IP address

IP Protocol

IPTV IPv4 IPv6 ISDN ISP IST ITU

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

J
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.

L
L2VPN Label distribution See Layer 2 virtual private network Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and the FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution. A protocol defined for distributing labels in MPLS network. It is the set of procedures and messages by which Label Switched Routers (LSRs) establish Label Switched Paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information directly to data-link layer switched paths. More information about the applicability of LDP can be found in [RFC3037]. A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain. Value range of the label allocated to peers. A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network It is a piece of equipment used to allocate communication links in a LAN. When Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addresses for traffic transmission. Therefore, a technology must exist to map the IP multicast address to the multicast MAC address. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Label Distribution Protocol

label edge router Label space label switched path

label switching router

LACP LAG LAN LAN switch Layer 2 Multicast

layer 2 switch

Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB LBM LBR See loopback See loopback message See loopback reply

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

LC LCT LDP LDP peer LER limit rate

Lucent connector local craft terminal See Label Distribution Protocol Two LSRs that use LDP to exchange labels or FEC mappings. LDP sessions exist between them. See label edge router A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a physical interface or a Tunnel interface. LR is directly enabled on the interface to control the traffic passing the interface. The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

line rate Link Aggregation Control Protocol

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. Link Control Protocol Link Group Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Monitoring In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes, configures, and tests data-link Internet connections. According to some principles, links are divided into the set in the logical term. A set of links is called the link group. The division makes management more convenient. The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is an L2D protocol defined in IEEE 802.1ab. Using the LLDP, the NMS can rapidly obtain the Layer 2 network topology and changes in topology when the network scales expand. Link monitoring is a mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the interface detects that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame seconds reaches or exceeds the specified threshold. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the condition of the link. A database containing the states of all the links. The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown. The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2. For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1. See logical link control
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

Link Protection

link state advertisement link state database Link status linktrace message

linktrace reply

LLC
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

LLDP LLID LMP LMSP load sharing

See Link Layer Discovery Protocol locate loopback ID link management protocol linear multiplex section protection A device running mode. Two or more hardware units can averagely share the system load according to their processing capabilities when they work normally. When a hardware unit becomes faulty, the other units fulfill the tasks of the faulty unit on the precondition of guaranteeing the system performance, for example, few call loss. A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). Services are not switched to the protection board or channel when a fault occurs, if currently no switching takes place. If currently the switching takes place, after the working board or channel recovers to normal, the services are not switched back to the working board or channel. When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN). loss of multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time. For 802.2ag MAC Ping, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM, and the response message is called Loopback Reply. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending time of LBR. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

local area network

Lock status

Locked switching

LOF logical link control

LOM loopback loopback message loopback reply

LOP LOS Loss Of Frame

loss of pointer

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

Loss Of Signal low priority queuing Lower subrack Lower Threshold LP LPQ LPT LR LSA LSDB LSP LSP tunnel

Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. LPQ is performed after WFQ. It also means the device schedules queues strictly based on the priority of queues. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a thresholdcrossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold. lower order path See low priority queuing link-state pass through See limit rate See link state advertisement See link state database See label switched path For an LSP, after a label is assigned to an FEC on the ingress, the label determines the traffic forwarding. The traffic is transparent to the intermediate nodes. In this sense, an LSP can be regarded as an LSP tunnel. See label switching router loss of sequence synchronization linktrace See linktrace message See linktrace reply

LSR LSS LT LTM LTR

M
MA MAC See maintenance association See media access control

MAC address learning Service that characterizes a learning bridge, in which the source MAC address of each received packets is stored so that future packets destined for that address can be forwarded only to the bridge interface on which that address is located. Packets destined for unrecognized addresses are forwarded out every bridge interface. This scheme helps minimize traffic on the attached LANs. MAC address learning is defined in the IEEE 802.1 standard. main distribution frame mains supply maintenance association A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated. The commercial power supply of a nation. In China, the nominal voltage of the mains supply is 220 V AC and the frequency is 50 Hz. That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

maintenance association end point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. A CFM Entity, associated with a specific pair of ISS Service Access Points or EISS Service Access Points, which reacts and responds to CFM frames. It is associated with a single Maintenance Association, and is an intermediate point within one or more Maintenance Entities. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. See metropolitan area network The right enabling a user to manage the specified devices and boards or the group of a user to manage specified domains. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal. In the master-slave mode, a designated master clock disseminates its frequency reference to all other slave clocks.

maintenance association intermediate point maintenance domain maintenance point MAN Management right manual switch

master-slave synchronization

maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network, 576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS MCF MCR MD MD5 MDF MDP Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair maximum burst size See message communication function See minimum cell rate See maintenance domain See message digest algorithm 5 See main distribution frame See message dispatch processor The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A logical entity that converts the format of the media of a network to meet the format requirement of another network. It can process audio services, video services and data services, and convert the media format in full duplex mode. In addition, it can play certain audio and video signals, and provide the IVR function and media conference. See maintenance association end point The LSR where one or more backup tunnels rejoin the path of the protected LSP downstream of the potential failure. The same LSR may be both an MP and a PLR simultaneously. The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs. A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128 bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number. The MDP roughly processes the received messages, and then sends the messages to the destinations. A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. See media gateway The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared radiation, typically above about 1 mm. Minimum Cell Rate (MCR). Parameter defined by the ATM Forum for ATM traffic management. MCR is defined only for Available Bit Rate (ABR) transmissions, and specifies the minimum value for the ACR. See maintenance association intermediate point It is an action to store a copy of a file to another archive site to release the load of the original site, or to provide an archive site closer to the users geographically. See multicast listener discovery

media gateway

MEP merge point

message communication function message digest algorithm 5

message dispatch processor metropolitan area network

MGW microwave minimum cell rate

MIP mirror MLD

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

MLPPP MP MP MP-BGP MPLS L2VPN

See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol See merge point See maintenance point See Multi-protocol Extensions for Border Gateway Protocol The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. See multiplex section See multiplex section protection See multiplex section termination See multiple spanning tree instance See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See Mean Time Between Failures See Mean Time To Repair See maximum transmission unit A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line, doubling connection rates to 128 kbit/s. A multi-protocol extension of BGP-4. MP-BGP supports multiple network layer protocols and identifies the protocols based on address families. MP-BGP transmits VPN composition information and VPN-IPv4 routes between PEs. A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. A set of members participating in the packet multicast service. The multicast group is defined by a rule (or set of rules) which identifies a collection of members implicitly or explicitly. This rule may associate members for the purpose of participating in a call, or may associate members who do not participate in data transfer but do participate in management, security, control, and accounting for the multicast group.

MPLS OAM

MPLS TE tunnel

MS MSP MST MSTI MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multi-link Point to Point Protocol Multi-protocol Extensions for Border Gateway Protocol Multicast

multicast group

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

multicast listener discovery

The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.

multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST region are as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation between the VLAN ID to MSTI The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.

Multiple Spanning Tree Region

multiplex section multiplex section protection multiplex section termination Multiplexing

Multiservice capability It specifies whether multiple services can be independently processed during a session.

N
NA NCP NE database See network address See Network Control Protocol There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a powerdown RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

NE ID NE side

An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID. The NE configuration data saved on the SCC board of the equipment, which can be uploaded to the network management system and then stored in databases on the network management system NE side. On the Internet, addresses are based on the IP protocol, which uses a 32-bit code in the IP header to identify host addresses. This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link. The maximum of network bridges that the communication passes through between any two terminal devices in the switched network. Network entity refers to the universal basic devices used to describe the functions and structure of the transmission network, which considerably facilitates the description of the network. The network entities include transmission object and sub-network. The network layer is layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.

network address Network Control Protocol Network diameter Network entity

network layer

Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.

network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by net

Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client. network unit layer The logical layer that implements the configuration, failure and performance for a single network element in the layered management architecture of the telecom network management system. See Network Management System next-hop See network node interface A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR.

NMS NHOP NNI Node Protection

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

NPC NRT NSAP NSF NTP

network parameter control non-real-time See network service access point not stop forwarding See Network Time Protocol

O
OAM OAMPDU ODF OOF See operation, administration and maintenance oam protocol data unit See optical distribution frame See out of frame

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Open Systems Interconnection A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. The Operations Log is a list of information about operation events. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).+ A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection. See Open Systems Interconnection See open shortest path first An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified number of consecutive frame bit positions. A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

operation log operation, administration and maintenance

optic fiber connector

optical distribution frame optical fiber OSI OSPF out of frame Outloop

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

overcurrent protection A circuit protection technology. When there is a great volume of traffic on a circuit and the current is stronger than the protection threshold, the circuit is cut off after the circuit protector timer expires. overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

P
P A backbone device that is located in the service provider network. A P device is not directly connected with the CE devices. The P devices only need the basic MPLS forwarding capability and do not maintain information about a VPN. See point to point service The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot accept any incoming data at a given moment. A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or bytes/s. A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections. A method for character level error detection. An extra bit added to a string of bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted. The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission. A layer within an SDH entity that supports the SDH based network transport services, e.g. multiplexing, cross-connection, regeneration. The network element function is modeled by managed objects. See peak burst size See printed circuit board PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems. See peak cell rate See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See protocol data unit See provider edge

P2P packet loss packet over SDH/ SONET Packet rate packet switching parity

pass-through path layer

PBS PCB PCI bus PCR PDH PDU PE

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

peak burst size

A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells. Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. BGP speakers exchanging information with each other. Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE). Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.

peak cell rate peak information rate Peer penultimate hop popping

per-hop behavior

Performance register

permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs. PGND phase-locked loop protection ground A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency. See per-hop behavior See penultimate hop popping Physical layer is the Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking The physical link refers to the link between two physical NEs. When the user creates NEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according to the topology structure information on the device. The physical link can modify the remarks information. It cannot be deleted. A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the data packet of the same size returned from the target host. See peak information rate
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

PHB PHP physical layer

physical link

Ping Test

PIR
Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

plesiochronous digital hierarchy PLL PLR point of local repair point to multipoint point to point service

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. See phase-locked loop See point of local repair The ingress node of the bypass tunnel. The head-end node of a backup tunnel or a detour tunnel. A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations (from one to many). A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are terminal users.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. policy template To define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example, rating, debiting and accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be instantiated. They can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation method, and action functions are carried out. Forwarding of interface-based TCP application data through SSL-encrypted tunnels. The priority used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially. See packet over SDH/SONET To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power See Point-to-Point Protocol See pulse per second See priority queue See priority queuing See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock Precision clock synchronization protocol for networked measurement and control systems, the 1588 standard stipulated by IEEE. During the process of establishing CR-LSP, if you cannot fine one path that satisfies requirements, you can remove another established path and take up its bandwidth resource. That is called preemption. CR-LSP check whether the path can be preempted according to two priority features, that is, Setup Priority and Holding Priority. Preemption is activated by the Resv message of RSVP-TE. Only when the priority of Path1, which you want to set up, is higher than that of Path2, you can preempt the bandwidth source of Path2 for Path1. A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.

port forwarding Port priority POS power up PPP PPS PQ PQ PRBS PRC Precision Time Protocol Preemption

printed circuit board

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

priority queue

A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it The Priority Queuing (PQ) is a queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are handled earlier than others. The channels allocated to transport the working traffic during a switch event. When there is a switch event, traffic on the affected working channels is bridged onto on the protection channels. A bar connecting the PGND cable of the cabinet so that the cabinet and the earth are in the same equipotential level. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection groud bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

priority queuing

protection channels

protection ground bar protection ground cable Protection path Protection service protocol data unit provider edge

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSTN PTMP PTN PTP public switched telephone network pulse per second See public switched telephone network See point to multipoint packet transport network See Precision Time Protocol A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes called POTS. Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used on other interfaces for high precision timing.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

PVP PWE3

See permanent virtual path See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user. See quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.

QoS quality of service

R
R99 radio access network radio frequency Release 1999 The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the CN from wireless network. A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. See radio access network

radio network controller RAN

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol rated current RDI Re-optimization An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. The input current of the equipment as declared by the manufacturer. See remote defect indication Re-optimization refers to the dynamic optimization of CR-LSPs, namely, the periodic calculation of CR-LSP routes. If the recalculated route is better than the current route, a new CR-LSP is created. Traffic switches from the original CR-LSP to the new CR-LSP, and then the original CR-LSP is deleted. Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is a host-to-host protocol. It is used to deliver realtime services such as audio and video over the IP network.

Real Time Protocol

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

real time variable bit rate

The rt-VBR is intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR), sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time. A type of host-to-host protocol used in real-time multimedia services such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and video. To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards. See random early detection A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference. See remote error indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.

Real-time Transport Protocol reboot RED reference clock REI remote defect indication

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. remote maintenance association end point remote monitor For the other devices in the same MA, their MEPs are called the Remote Maintenance association End Points (RMEPs). A widely used network management standard defined by the IETF, and it enhances the MIB II standard greatly. It mainly functions to monitor the data traffic over a network segment or the entire network. RMON is completely based on the SNMP architecture, including the NMS and the Agent running on each network device.

Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC. required Min Rx interval Resource Reservation Protocol The minimum interval between received BFD control packets that the local system is capable of supporting. The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate. See radio frequency See Request For Comments A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. See Routing Information Protocol See remote maintenance association end point

reverse pressure

RF RFC ring network RIP RMEP

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

RMON RMRI RNC RoHS rollback Root alarm Route restriction

See remote monitor See required Min Rx interval See radio network controller restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation. An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. The constraint conditions for calculating a route. When creating a trail, the user can specify the explicit route and the NEs that the trail cannot pass. The explicit route and the NEs are the constraints for calculating the route. The inevitable trail only functions when the number of routes is calculated as 1. Double-click the NE icon can set the NE as an NE that cannot be passed, and double-clicking it again can cancel the setting. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. Routing policies are implemented to filter routing information, mainly through the change of route properties. A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be forwarded. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232. See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol See real time variable bit rate See Real-time Transport Protocol See Real Time Protocol

Routing Information Protocol

routing policy routing protocol routing table

RS232

RS422

RSTP RSVP rt-VBR RTP RTP

S
S-VLAN service VLAN

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

S1 byte

In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol. See square connector sustainable cell rate See signal degrade See synchronous digital hierarchy serious disturbance period A message generated when a security-related event that is defined by security policy as being an alarm condition has been detected. A security alarm is intended to come to the attention of appropriate entities in a timely manner. The classification of the security according to its significance. Security logs record the security operations on the NMS, such as logging in to the server, modifying the password, and exiting from the NMS server. See synchronous equipment management function An identifying number used to designate a block of data, an operation, or part of an operation. The user and/or network information required for the normal functioning of service. See synchronous equipment timing source The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels. See small form-factor pluggable The process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to certain defined traffic profile. See single-line high speed digital subscriber line Link-state, is a hierarchical IGP routing algorithm proposed as a successor to RIP in the Internet community. OSPF features include least-cost routing, multipath routing, and load balancing. OSPF was derived from an early version of the IS-IS protocol. See ISIS. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

SC SCR SD SDH SDP security alarm

security level security log SEMF sequence number service data SETS Setup Priority

SFP shaping SHDSL shortest path first

signal cable signal degrade

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

signaling stream Simple Network Management Protocol

Control stream that controls calls and bearer. A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Simple traffic classification (STC) organizes data packets into multiple priorities or multiple service classes. A network administrator can set STC policies. An STC policy can include the IP precedence or the DSCP value of an IP packet, the EXP value of an MPLS packet, the ToS field in the IP packet header or the 802.1p value of a VLAN packet.

Simple Traffic Classification

single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-line high speed digital subscriber line A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide the broadband access service. To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. sub-miniature B Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption See Simple Network Management Protocol See synchronous optical network

Slicing small form-factor pluggable SMB Smooth upgrade SNMP SONET

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SPE SPF SQN square connector SSM SSMB static ARP See superstratum provider edge See shortest path first See sequence number Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style". See Synchronization Status Message synchronization status message byte A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP addresses must be forwarded through this gateway.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

static route

A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must be changed by the operators. A static routing table is constructed manually by the system administrator using the route command.

static routing table

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STP subnet mask See Spanning Tree Protocol The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address. The packet that has a length of more than 1,600 bytes. The packet that has a length of less than 64 bytes.

super long packet super short packet

superstratum provider The SPE devices are core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. edge The UPE devices that are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE. Switching restoration time It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP sub-network.

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. Synchronize Alarm When synchronizing the alarms, the network management system checks the alarms in the network management system database and the alarms in the NE. If they are inconsistent, the alarms in the NE are uploaded to the network management system database and overwrite the old ones. To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as to synchronize all NEs with the server. A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronize NE time synchronous digital hierarchy

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

synchronous equipment management function synchronous equipment timing source synchronous optical network

The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface. The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock. A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second). A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813. Syslog is an industry standard protocol for recording device logs. Syslog service is used to manage the device to send the log information to the host. It is used on the sending-information port. System log tracks miscellaneous system events like startup, shutdown and events like hardware and controller failures.

Synchronous source SYSLOG Syslog Service system logging

T
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. It is a concept in geometry. There is a public node between two ring networks. The public node often brings in single-point failure. See traffic channel See Transmission Control Protocol See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol See time division duplex See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering

tangent rings TCH TCP TCP/IP TDD TDM TE

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. threshold-crossing throughput TIM time division duplex A performance monitoring parameter reaches or exceeds a preset threshold. The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection, service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth. trace identifier mismatch In Time Division Duplex (TDD) system, the uplink and downlink links use different timeslots. They usually share the same frequency.

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

time division multiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. A network condition where a slave clock providing synchronization becomes locked to its own timing signal. It is generally created when the slave clock timing information is looped back to its own input, either directly or via other network equipment. Timing loops should be prevented in networks by careful network design. See traffic management See topology management See Telecommunication Management Network

Time Slot time to live

timing loop

TM TM TMN

token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input. token ring The IEEE 802.5 standard for a token-passing ring network with a star-configured physical topology. Internally, signals travel around the network from one station to the next in a ring. Physically, each station connects to a central hub called a multistation access server. Permissible degree of variation from a pre-set standard. Topology management displays static configuration objects on a graphic interface, as well as the status data, monitoring data, and alarm data on the objects. It also enables users to perform operations on the GUI. The topology management is integrated with the EAM, fault, and security NBI common service subsystems to provide the domainbased element management solution. A basic element in the NMS topology view, which includes submap, node, connection, and so on. A basic component for the human-machine interface. The topology view directly displays the networking of a network as well as the alarm and communication statuses of each network element and subnet. In this manner, the topology view reflects the basic running conditions of the network. See type of service A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header. See tributary protection switch

tolerance topology management

Topology Object Topology view

ToS ToS priority TPS

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

TPS protection

The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to the specified protection board and the protection board takes over the job of the working board. After the fault is cleared, the service is automatically switched to the original board See token ring Indicates the channel that carries voice coding information or user data. Traffic channels are classified into voice traffic channels and data traffic channels. Traffic classification enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified quality of service (QoS) in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently. A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads. It is the traffic frame discard control. Two options are provided: enable and disable. It indicates the means by which the NE discards cells when the network is congested. When the frame discard mark is closed, the cells will be discarded at the cell level; when it is opened, they will be discarded at the frame level. Here, "frame" refers to the AAL protocol data unit. Traffic management refers to the process of monitoring user traffic on a network and redistributing/rerouting it when necessary in order to ensure optimal network performance A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions.

TR traffic channel traffic classification

traffic engineering

Traffic frame discard flag

traffic management

traffic policy

trail termination source The trail termination source identifier (TTSI) of the LSP is used to uniquely identify an identifier LSP on a network. transit transit delay The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled. The middle node is named Transit. The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the site finishes the data frame transmission or to the time when all data frames are received by the receiver. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide internetworks. A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.

Transmission Control Protocol

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol transparent transmission

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

transport plane

The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional transfer of user information, from one location to another. It can also provide transfer of some control and network management information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the transport network defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805. Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network See two rate three color marker The main (often large diameter) cable of a coaxial cable system. A transmission channel between two switching centers or nodes. It is used to connect the exchange to the network. See time to live See trail termination source identifier tributary unit See tributary unit group A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel. It is a four-pair wire medium-composed of pairs of wires - used in a variety of networks. The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR. A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS field has 8 bits in length, which is divided into five subfields.

tributary protection switch tributary unit group

trTCM trunk cable trunk line TTL TTSI TU TUG Tunnel

twisted pair two rate three color marker

type of service

U
U-VLAN UAS UAT UBR UBR+ UDP A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN. unavailable second See unavailable time event See unspecified bit rate Unspecified Bit Rate Plus See User Datagram Protocol

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds. underfloor cabling UNI unicast unspecified bit rate The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See user network interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. See usage parameter control/network parameter control The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded. uninterruptible power supply Usage Parameter Control/Network Parameter Control. During the communication, the UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to the UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. The UPC locates at the user/network interface, while the NPC at the network interface. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

UPC/NPC Upper subrack Upper threshold UPS usage parameter control/network parameter control

User Datagram Protocol

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches). User operation log Record the operation of the user for the convenience of analysis and query.

V
V-NNI V-UNI variable bit rate See virtual network-network interface See virtual user-network interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. See variable bit rate See virtual channel See virtual channel connection virtual circuit connectivity verification
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

VBR VC VCC VCCV


Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

VCI VCTRUNK virtual channel

See virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in the ATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by the switching. The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A channel or circuit established between two points on an ATM /a network. Virtual circuits can be Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) or Switched Virtual Circuits (SVCs) . A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparently transporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface. A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM network based on a common VPI. The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual channel connection virtual channel identifier virtual circuit virtual leased line virtual local area network virtual networknetwork interface virtual path virtual path identifier virtual private LAN service

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual private wire service virtual route forward A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN. VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device.

virtual switch instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW. virtual user-network interface VLAN A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS. See virtual local area network

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

VLAN ID VLAN mapping

Namely, it is the virtual LAN identifier. One Ethernet port can support 4K VLAN routes, and one NE can support up to 8K VLAN routes. A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the destination. One of the properties of the MST region, which describes the relationship between VLANs and spanning tree instances. See virtual leased line An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path See virtual path identifier See virtual private LAN service See virtual private network See virtual private wire service See virtual route forward See virtual switch instance

VLAN mapping table VLL voice over IP

VoIP VP VPI VPLS VPN VPWS VRF VSI

W
WAN Wander See wide area network The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than 10Hz). The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a periodic signal that is propagated through space. Wavelength is symbolized by the Greek letter lambda and can be calculated as speed divided by frequency. A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber. See wavelength division multiplexing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

wavelength

wavelength division multiplexing WDM weighted fair queuing

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description

G Glossary

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. WFQ wide area network See weighted fair queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic. See weighted random early detection The packets with received messages not translated or translated incorrectly.

winding pipe Working path WRED wrong packets

X
X digital subscriber line A family of bandwidth-efficient modulation techniques, developed to achieve extremely high data transfer rates over twisted- pair cables. While the letter "X" represents a variable, DSL stands for "Digital Subscriber Line". XDSL techniques may offer several benefits such as, capability to offer high-speed data services to customers, low cost by using existing infrastructure and switching congestion relief caused by existing data users. xDSL See X digital subscriber line

Issue 02 (2013-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

Anda mungkin juga menyukai